YASKAWA E7 Drive Instruction Manual And Parameter Description

- ~ ARTISAN®
~I
TECHNOLOGY GROUP
Full-service, independent repair center
with experienced engineers and technicians on staff.
We buy your excess, underutilized, and idle equipment
along with credit for buybacks and trade-ins.
Your definitive source
for quality pre-owned
equipment.
Custom engineering
so your equipment works exactly as you specify.
• Critical and expedited services
• Leasing / Rentals/ Demos
• In stock/ Ready-to-ship
• !TAR-certified secure asset solutions
Expert team I Trust guarantee I 100% satisfaction
Artisan Technology Group
(217) 352-9330 | [email protected] | artisantg.com
A ll trade marks, brand names, and brands appearing he rein are the pro perty of their respective owne rs.
Find the OMRON Varispeed E7 IP54 at our website: Click HERE
HVAC Frequency Inverter
Varispeed E7
Instruction Manual and
Parameter Description
Model: CIMR-E7C
YEG-TOE-S616-56.1B
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Contents
Warnings........................................................................................................ IX
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use! ................................................. X
EMC Compatibility ........................................................................................ XII
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .......................................................... XIV
Registered Trademarks .............................................................................. XVII
1
Handling Inverters .................................................................. 1-1
Varispeed E7 Introduction ............................................................................1-2
Varispeed E7 Applications ............................................................................... 1-2
Varispeed E7 Models ....................................................................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................1-4
Checks ............................................................................................................. 1-4
Nameplate Information..................................................................................... 1-4
Component Names .......................................................................................... 1-6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...............................................................1-8
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)......................................................................... 1-8
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1)..................................................... 1-9
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ............................................ 1-11
Installation Site............................................................................................... 1-11
Controlling the Ambient Temperature............................................................. 1-11
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter ................................................... 1-11
Installation Orientation and Space..............................................................1-12
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover .............................................1-13
Removing the Terminal Cover........................................................................ 1-13
Attaching the Terminal Cover ......................................................................... 1-13
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................1-14
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less .......................................................................... 1-14
Inverters of 22 kW or More............................................................................. 1-17
2
Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
Connections to Peripheral Devices ..............................................................2-2
Connection Diagram .....................................................................................2-3
Circuit Descriptions .......................................................................................... 2-4
Terminal Block Configuration........................................................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals .......................................................................2-6
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors........................................ 2-6
Main Circuit Terminal Functions ..................................................................... 2-11
Main Circuit Configurations ............................................................................ 2-12
Standard Connection Diagrams ..................................................................... 2-13
Wiring the Main Circuits ................................................................................. 2-14
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals .................................................................2-19
III
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wire Sizes ...................................................................................................... 2-19
Control Circuit Terminal Functions ................................................................. 2-21
Control Circuit Terminal Connections ............................................................. 2-24
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions ................................................................. 2-25
Wiring Check.............................................................................................. 2-26
Checks ........................................................................................................... 2-26
3
Digital Operator and Modes....................................................3-1
Digital Operator ............................................................................................ 3-2
Digital Operator Display ................................................................................... 3-2
Digital Operator Keys ....................................................................................... 3-2
Modes .......................................................................................................... 3-4
Inverter Modes ................................................................................................. 3-4
Switching Modes .............................................................................................. 3-5
Drive Mode ....................................................................................................... 3-6
Quick Programming Mode................................................................................ 3-7
Advanced Programming Mode......................................................................... 3-8
Verify Mode .................................................................................................... 3-10
Autotuning Mode ............................................................................................ 3-11
4
Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1
Trial Operation Procedure ............................................................................ 4-2
Trial Operation.............................................................................................. 4-3
Application Confirmation .................................................................................. 4-3
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper
(400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher)...................................................... 4-3
Power ON......................................................................................................... 4-3
Checking the Display Status............................................................................. 4-4
Basic Settings .................................................................................................. 4-5
Selecting the V/f pattern ................................................................................... 4-6
Autotuning ........................................................................................................ 4-7
Application Settings.......................................................................................... 4-9
No-load Operation ............................................................................................ 4-9
Loaded Operation ............................................................................................ 4-9
Check and Recording User Constants ........................................................... 4-10
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................................................ 4-11
5
User Constants ........................................................................5-1
User Constant Descriptions.......................................................................... 5-2
Description of User Constant Tables ................................................................ 5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels........................................... 5-3
User Constants Setable in Quick Programming Mode ..................................... 5-4
User Constant Tables ................................................................................. 5-10
IV
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
A: Setup Settings ........................................................................................... 5-10
Application Constants: b ................................................................................ 5-12
Tuning Constants: C....................................................................................... 5-18
Reference Constants: d ................................................................................. 5-21
Motor Constants: E ........................................................................................ 5-23
Option Constants: F ....................................................................................... 5-25
Terminal Function Constants: H ..................................................................... 5-26
Protection Function Constants: L ................................................................... 5-32
N: Special Adjustments .................................................................................. 5-38
Digital Operator Constants: o ......................................................................... 5-39
T: Motor Autotuning ........................................................................................ 5-42
U: Monitor Constants...................................................................................... 5-42
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)..................... 5-47
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) .................. 5-48
6
Constant Settings by Function.............................................. 6-1
Application Selections ..................................................................................6-2
Setting the Carrier Frequency .......................................................................... 6-2
Frequency Reference ...................................................................................6-5
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source .................................................... 6-5
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation................................................................... 6-7
Run Command .............................................................................................6-9
Selecting the Run Command Source............................................................... 6-9
Stopping Methods....................................................................................... 6-11
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input ................... 6-11
Using the DC Injection Brake ......................................................................... 6-14
Motor Pre-heat Function ................................................................................ 6-14
Using an Emergency Stop.............................................................................. 6-15
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics...........................................6-16
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times ................................................ 6-16
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration
(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function)............................................. 6-18
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration
(Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function) ............................................ 6-20
Adjusting Frequency References ...............................................................6-22
Adjusting Analog Frequency References....................................................... 6-22
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function) ........................ 6-24
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ...................................6-25
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency ............................................................ 6-25
Limiting Minimum Frequency ......................................................................... 6-25
Frequency Detection ..................................................................................6-26
Speed Agreement Function ........................................................................... 6-26
Improved Operating Efficiency ...................................................................6-28
V
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Torque Compensation for Sufficient Torque at Start
and Low-speed Operation .............................................................................. 6-28
Hunting-Prevention Function.......................................................................... 6-29
Machine Protection .................................................................................... 6-30
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation ................................................... 6-30
Detecting Motor Torque .................................................................................. 6-31
Motor Overload Protection ............................................................................. 6-33
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs ......................... 6-35
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction and Output Phase Rotation....................... 6-37
Automatically Restart ................................................................................. 6-38
Restarting Automatically After Momentary Power Loss ................................. 6-38
Speed Search ................................................................................................ 6-39
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency
Reference Is Lost ........................................................................................... 6-44
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function)............... 6-45
Inverter Protection ...................................................................................... 6-47
Inverter Overheat Protection .......................................................................... 6-47
Input Phase Loss Detection Level.................................................................. 6-47
Ground Fault Protection ................................................................................. 6-48
Cooling Fan Control ....................................................................................... 6-48
Setting the Ambient Temperature................................................................... 6-49
OL2 Characteristics at Low Speed................................................................. 6-49
Soft CLA Selection ......................................................................................... 6-50
Input Terminal Functions ............................................................................ 6-51
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator
and Control Circuit Terminals ......................................................................... 6-51
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)........................................ 6-52
Multifunction Analog Input A2 Disable/Enable ............................................... 6-52
Drive Enable/Disable...................................................................................... 6-53
Bypass Drive Enable ...................................................................................... 6-53
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration
(Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) ......................................................... 6-53
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals
(UP/DOWN).................................................................................................... 6-55
Trim Control Function (+/– Speed) ................................................................. 6-58
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing ............................................. 6-59
Switching Operation Source to Communication Option Card ........................ 6-60
Switching Operation Source to MEMOBUS communication .......................... 6-60
AUTO/HAND Mode Switching by Digital Input ............................................... 6-61
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG) ................................................................................................ 6-61
Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Error Function).... 6-62
Output Terminal Functions ......................................................................... 6-63
Monitor Constants ...................................................................................... 6-66
Using the Analog Monitor Constants.............................................................. 6-66
Individual Functions ................................................................................... 6-68
VI
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Using MEMOBUS Communications............................................................... 6-68
Using the Timer Function ............................................................................... 6-82
Using PI Control ............................................................................................. 6-83
Energy-saving ................................................................................................ 6-93
Setting Motor Constants................................................................................. 6-94
Setting the V/f Pattern .................................................................................... 6-95
High Slip Braking.......................................................................................... 6-101
Digital Operator Functions ........................................................................6-102
Setting Digital Operator Functions ............................................................... 6-102
Copying Constants ....................................................................................... 6-105
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator............................... 6-109
Setting a Password ...................................................................................... 6-109
Displaying User-set Constants Only............................................................. 6-110
7
Troubleshooting...................................................................... 7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ............................................................7-2
Fault Detection ................................................................................................. 7-2
Alarm Detection................................................................................................ 7-7
Operation Errors............................................................................................... 7-9
Errors During Autotuning................................................................................ 7-10
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function ................................. 7-10
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................7-12
If Constants Cannot Be Set............................................................................ 7-12
If the Motor Does Not Operate ....................................................................... 7-13
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed ......................................... 7-14
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow ................... 7-14
If the Motor Operates at Higher Speed than the Frequency Reference......... 7-14
If Motor Deceleration is Slow ......................................................................... 7-15
If the Motor Overheats ................................................................................... 7-15
If peripheral devices like PLC’s or other are influenced by the starting
or running inverter .......................................................................................... 7-16
If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates when a RUN Command is Input...... 7-16
If There is Mechanical Oscillation .................................................................. 7-16
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped ......................... 7-17
If OV (Overvoltage) or OC (Overcurrent) is Detected When a Fan
is Started, or Fan Stalls .................................................................................. 7-17
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference........................ 7-17
8
Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 8-1
Maintenance and Inspection.........................................................................8-2
Outline of Maintenance .................................................................................... 8-2
Daily Inspection................................................................................................ 8-2
Periodic Inspection........................................................................................... 8-2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts ......................................................................... 8-3
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline ................................................................... 8-4
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card ............................. 8-6
VII
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
9
Specifications ..........................................................................9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications .................................................................. 9-2
Specifications by Model.................................................................................... 9-2
Common Specifications.................................................................................... 9-4
10
Appendix ................................................................................10-1
Inverter Application Precautions ................................................................ 10-2
Selection ........................................................................................................ 10-2
Installation ...................................................................................................... 10-3
Settings .......................................................................................................... 10-3
Handling ......................................................................................................... 10-4
Motor Application Precautions ................................................................... 10-5
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor.......................................... 10-5
Using the Inverter for Special Motors ............................................................. 10-6
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts and Chains) ........ 10-6
User Constants........................................................................................... 10-7
VIII
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Warnings
CAUTION
Cables must not be connected or disconnected, nor signal tests carried out, while the power is
switched on.
The Varispeed DC bus capacitor remains charged even after the power has been switched off. To
avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect the frequency inverter from the mains before carrying out
maintenance. Then wait for at least 5 minutes after all LEDs have gone out.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the Varispeed. The frequency inverter contains
semiconductors, which are not designed for such high voltages.
Do not remove the digital operator while the mains supply is switched on. The printed circuit board
must also not be touched while the inverter is connected to the power.
Never connect general LC/RC interference suppression filters, capacitors or overvoltage protection
devices to the inverter input or output.
To avoid unnecessary overcurrent faults, etc, being displayed, the signaling contacts of any contactor
or switch fitted between inverter and motor must be integrated into the inverter control logic (eg
baseblock).
This is absolutely imperative!
This manual must be read thoroughly before connecting and operating the inverter. All safety
precautions and instructions for use must be followed.
The inverter may must be operated with the appropriate line filters, following the installation
instructions in this manual and with all covers closed and terminals covered.
Only then will adequate protection be provided. Please do not connect or operate any equipment with
visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment
damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
IX
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use!
1. General
Please read these safety precautions and instructions for use thoroughly before installing and operating this
inverter. Also read all of the warning signs on the inverter and ensure they are never damaged or removed.
Live and hot inverter components may be accessible during operation. Removal of housing components, the
digital operator or terminal covers runs the risk of serious injuries or damage in the event of incorrect installation or operation. The fact that frequency inverters control rotating mechanical machine components can give
rise to other dangers.
The instructions in this manual must be followed. Installation, operation and maintenance may only be carried
out by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety precautions, qualified personnel are defined as individuals who are familiar with the installation, starting, operation and maintenance of frequency inverters and
have the proper qualifications for this work. Safe operation of these units is only possible if they are used
properly for their intended purpose.
The DC bus capacitors can remain live for about 5 minutes after the inverter is disconnected from the power.
It is therefore necessary to wait for this time before opening its covers. All of the main circuit terminals may
still carry dangerous voltages.
Children and other unauthorized persons must not be allowed access to these inverters.
Keep these Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use readily accessible and supply them to all persons with
any form of access to the inverters.
2. Intended Use
Frequency inverters are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.
Their installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive:
EN 50178, 1997-10,
Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices
EN 60204-1, 1997-12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices
Part 1: General Requirements (IEC 60204-1:1997)/
Please note: Includes Corrigendum of September 1998
EN 61010-1, A2, 1995 Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 950, 1991 + A1, 1992 + A2, 1993 + A3, 1995 + A4, 1996, modified)
CE marking is carried out to EN 50178, using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installation instructions.
3. Transportation and storage
The instructions for transportation, storage and proper handling must be followed in accordance with the technical data.
4. Installation
Install and cool the inverters as specified in the documentation. The cooling air must flow in the specified
direction. The inverter may therefore only be operated in the specified position (e.g. upright). Maintain the
specified clearances. Protect the inverters against impermissible loads. Components must not be bent nor insulation clearances changed. To avoid damage being caused by static electricity, do not touch any electronic
components or contacts.
X
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
5. Electrical Connection
Carry out any work on live equipment in compliance with the national safety and accident prevention regulations. Carry out electrical installation in compliance with the relevant regulations. In particular, follow the
installation instructions ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), eg shielding, grounding, filter
arrangement and laying of cables. This also applies to equipment with the CE mark. It is the responsibility of
the manufacturer of the system or machine to ensure conformity with EMC limits.
Your supplier or Yaskawa representative must be contacted when using leakage current circuit braker in conjunction with frequency inverters.
In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the
relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified.
6. Notes
The VARISPEED E7 frequency inverters are certified to CE, UL, and c-UL.
XI
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
EMC Compatibility
1. Introduction
This manual was compiled to help system manufacturers using YASKAWA frequency inverters design and
install electrical switchgear. It also describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Directive. The
manual's installation and wiring instructions must therefore be followed.
Our products are tested by authorized bodies using the standards listed below.
Product standard:
EN 61800-3:1996
EN 61800-3; A11:2000
2. Measures to Ensure Conformity of YASKAWA Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive
YASKAWA frequency inverters do not necessarily have to be installed in a switch cabinet.
It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all of the possible types of installation. This manual therefore
has to be limited to general guidelines.
All electrical equipment produces radio and line-borne interference at various frequencies. The cables pass
this on to the environment like an aerial.
Connecting an item of electrical equipment (eg drive) to a supply without a line filter can therefore allow HF
or LF interference to get into the mains.
The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components, proper grounding and
shielding of cables.
A large contact area is necessary for low-impedance grounding of HF interference. The use of grounding
straps instead of cables is therefore definitely advisable.
Moreover, cable shields must be connected with purpose-made ground clips.
3. Laying Cables
Measures Against Line-Borne Interference:
Line filter and frequency inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate. Mount the two components as
close to each other as possible, with cables kept as short as possible.
Use a power cable with well-grounded shield. Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 20 meters in length.
Arrange all grounds so as to maximize the area of the end of the lead in contact with the ground terminal (eg
metal plate).
Shielded Cable:
– Use a cable with braided shield.
– Ground the maximum possible area of the shield. It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the
cable to the ground plate with metal clips (see following figure).
XII
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Ground clip
Ground plate
The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal. Remove any coats of varnish and paint.
– Ground the cable shields at both ends.
– Ground the motor of the machine.
You can find further informations in the document EZZ006543 which can be ordered at Yaskawa.
XIII
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Recommended Line Filters for Varispeed E7 made by Schaffner EMV AG
Inverter Model
Line Filter (Schaffner)
Model
EN
55011
Class*
Current
(A)
Weight
(kg)
Dimensions
WxDxH
FS 5972-10-07
B, 50 m
B, 50 m
B, 50 m
B, 50 m
B, 50 m
10
1.1
141 x 46 x 330
FS 5972-18-07
B, 50 m
B, 50 m
18
1.3
141 x 46 x 330
FS 5972-21-07
FS 5972-35-07
B, 50 m
B, 50 m
21
35
1.8
2.1
206 x 50 x 355
206 x 50 x 355
FS 5972-60-07
B, 50 m
B, 50 m
60
4.0
236 x 65 x 408
FS 5972-70-52
B, 50 m
B, 50 m
70
3.4
80 x 185 x 329
FS 5972-100-35
B, 50 m
B, 50 m
100
4.5
90 x 150 x 326
130
170
4.7
6.0
11.7
90 x 180 x 366
120 x 170 x 451
130 x 240 x 610
7.0
230 x 125 x 300
Varispeed E7
CIMR-E7C40P4
CIMR-E7C40P7
CIMR-E7C41P5
CIMR-E7C42P2
CIMR-E7C43P7
CIMR-E7C44P0
CIMR-E7C45P5
CIMR-E7C47P5
CIMR-E7C4011
CIMR-E7C4015
CIMR-E7C4018
CIMR-E7C4022
CIMR-E7C4030
CIMR-E7C4037
CIMR-E7C4045
CIMR-E7C4055
CIMR-E7C4075
CIMR-E7C4090
CIMR-E7C4110
CIMR-E7C4132
CIMR-E7C4160
CIMR-E7C4185
CIMR-E7C4220
CIMR-E7C4300
FS 5972-130-35
FS 5972-170-40
FS 5972-250-37
or
FN 3359-250-28
B, 50 m
B, 50 m
A, 50 m
FS 5972-410-99
A, 50 m
410
10.5
260 x 115 x 386
FS 5972-600-99
FS 5972-800-99
A, 50 m
A, 50 m
600
800
11
31
260 x 135 x 386
300 x 160 x 716
Maximum Voltage
Ambient Temperature
250
A, 50 m
: AC 480V 3phase
: 45°C (max.)
* Permissible emission of power drive systems for commercial and light environment (EN61800-3, A11)
(general availability, 1st environment)
XIV
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Line Filters (Schaffner)
EN
55011
Class
Current
(A)
Weight
(kg)
Dimensions
WxDxH
FS 5972-10-07
B*
B*
B*
7
1.1
141 x 45 x 330
FS 5972-18-07
B*
18
1.7
141 x 46 x 330
FS 5973-35-07
B*
B*
35
1.4
141 x 46 x 330
FS 5973-60-07
B*
B*
60
3
206 x 60 x 355
FS 5973-100-07
A
A
100
4.9
236 x 80 x 408
FS 5973-130-35
A
A
130
4.3
90 x 180 x 366
FS 5973-160-40
A
160
6
120 x 170 x 451
FS 5973-240-37
A
A
240
11
130 x 240 x 610
A
A
A
500
19.5
300 x 160 x 564
Varispeed E7
CIMR-E7C20P4
CIMR-E7C20P7
CIMR-E7C21P5
CIMR-E7C22P2
CIMR-E7C23P7
CIMR-E7C25P5
CIMR-E7C27P5
CIMR-E7C2011
CIMR-E7C2015
CIMR-E7C2018
CIMR-E7C2022
CIMR-E7C2030
CIMR-E7C2037
CIMR-E7C2045
CIMR-E7C2055
CIMR-E7C2075
CIMR-E7C2090
CIMR-E7C2110
Type
FS 5973-500-37
Max. motor cable length
Max. voltage
Ambient temperature
: 10 m Class B, 50 m Class A
: AC 240 V, 3 ph.
: 45°C max.
XV
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation inverters and EMC filters
PE
L3
L1 L2
Ground Bonds
( remove any paint )
PE
Line
Inverter
Filter
Load
V
L2
PE L1 L3 U WPE
Cable Length
as short as possible
Metal Plate
Motor cable
screened
Ground Bonds
( remove any paint )
M
3~
XVI
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
• InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
• ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
• LONworks is a registered trademark of the Echolon.
XVII
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
XVIII
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed E7 Introduction............................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery........................................1-4
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions..............................1-8
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ........... 1-11
Installation Orientation and Space .............................1-12
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............1-13
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator
and Front Cover .........................................................1-13
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Varispeed E7 Introduction
Varispeed E7 Applications
The Varispeed E7 is ideal for the following applications.
• Fan, blower, and pump applications
Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation. Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation.
Varispeed E7 Models
The Varispeed E7 Series includes Inverters in two voltage classes: 200 V and 400 V. The maximum motor capacities
vary from 0.55 to 300 kW (42 models).
Table 1.1 Varispeed E7 Models
Voltage
Class
200 V class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity
kW
Varispeed E7
Output
Capacity
kVA
Basic Model Number
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-E7C
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-E7C
0.55
1.2
CIMR-E7C20P4
0.75
1.6
CIMR-E7C20P7
20P41
20P71
1.5
2.7
CIMR-E7C21P5
21P51
2.2
3.7
CIMR-E7C22P2
3.7
5.7
CIMR-E7C23P7
5.5
8.8
CIMR-E7C25P5
7.5
12
CIMR-E7C27P5
11
17
CIMR-E7C2011
20111
15
22
CIMR-E7C2015
20151
18.5
27
CIMR-E7C2018
22
32
CIMR-E7C2022
20220
20221
30
44
CIMR-E7C2030
20300
20301
37
55
CIMR-E7C2037
20370
20371
45
69
CIMR-E7C2045
20450
20451
55
82
CIMR-E7C2055
20550
20551
75
110
CIMR-E7C2075
20750
20751
90
130
CIMR-E7C2090
20900
–
110
160
CIMR-E7C2110
21100
–
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmounted model.
22P21
23P71
25P51
27P51
20181
1-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Varispeed E7 Introduction
Voltage
Class
400 V class
Maximum
Motor
Capacity
kW
Varispeed E7
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Output
Capacity
kVA
Basic Model Number
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-E7C
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-E7C
0.55
1.4
CIMR-E7C40P4
40P41
0.75
1.6
CIMR-E7C40P7
40P71
1.5
2.8
CIMR-E7C41P5
41P51
2.2
4.0
CIMR-E7C42P2
3.7
5.8
CIMR-E7C43P7
4.0
6.6
CIMR-E7C44P0
5.5
9.5
CIMR-E7C45P5
7.5
13
CIMR-E7C47P5
11
18
CIMR-E7C4011
40111
15
24
CIMR-E7C4015
40151
18.5
30
CIMR-E7C4018
22
34
CIMR-E7C4022
40220
40221
30
46
CIMR-E7C4030
40300
40301
37
57
CIMR-E7C4037
40370
40371
45
69
CIMR-E7C4045
40450
40451
55
85
CIMR-E7C4055
40550
40551
75
110
CIMR-E7C4075
40750
40751
90
140
CIMR-E7C4090
40900
40901
110
160
CIMR-E7C4110
41100
41101
132
200
CIMR-E7C4132
41320
41321
160
230
CIMR-E7C4160
41600
41601
185
280
CIMR-E7C4185
41850
–
220
390
CIMR-E7C4220
42200
–
300
510
CIMR-E7C4300
43000
–
42P21
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmount model.
43P71
44P01
45P51
47P51
40181
1-3
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Table 1.2 Checks
Item
Method
Has the correct model of Inverter been
delivered?
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or
other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components
loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or
your Yaskawa representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic European Inverter: 3-phase, 400 VAC,
0.55 kW, IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 standards
Inverter model
Inverter
specifications
Input specifications
Output specifications
Lot number
OUTPUT: AC3PH 0-480V 0-120Hz
1.8A 1.4kVA
Mass
Serial number
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
1-4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Confirmations upon Delivery
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum
motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR – E7 C 2 0 P4
Inverter
Varispeed E7
No.
C
Specification
European Standard
No.
2
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
4
AC Input, 3-phase, 400 V
No.
0P4
0P7
to
300
Voltage Class
Max. Motor Capacity
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
to
300 kW
“P” Indicates the decimal point.
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity,
the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
2 0P 4 1
Voltage Class
No.
2
AC Input, 3-phase, 200 V
4
AC Input, 3-phase 400 V
No.
0P4
0P7
to
300
Max. Motor Capacity
0.55 kW
0.75 kW
to
300 kW
No.
0
1
Protective Structure
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
Enclosed wall-mounted (IEC IP20,
NEMA Type 1)
“P” Indicates the decimal point
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
1-5
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Component Names
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5.
Top protective cover (Part of Enclosed Wallmounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA Type 1)
Mounting hole
Front cover
Digital Operator
Diecast case
Terminal cover
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or Less)
1-6
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Confirmations upon Delivery
Inverters of 22 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.6. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.7.
Mounting holes
Inverter cover
Cooling fan
Front cover
Digital Operator
Terminal cover
Nameplate
Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)
Control
circuit
terminals
Charge indicator
Main
circuit
terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (22 kW or More)
1-7
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.55 to 18.5 kW
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 110 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 185 to 300 kW
Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
1-8
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1)
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1) are shown below.
Grommet
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.55 to 18.5 kW
200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 75 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW
Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
1-9
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
of 200V Class Inverters and 400V Class Inverters of 0.55 to 160 kW
Max.
AppliVoltage cable
Class Motor
Output W
[kW]
Caloric
Value(W)
Dimensions (mm)
Open Chassis (IP00)
H
D
W1 H1
H2
D1
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1)
t1
Approx.
Mass
W
H
D
W1 H0
H1
H2
H3
D1
t1
Approx.
Mass
Mounting
Holes
d*
Total Cooling
Heat
Method
Exter InterGennal
nal
eration
0.55
20
39
0.75
27
42
50
50
1.5
157
140 280
2.2
3.7
39
126 266
7
177
5.5
7.5
15
200 V
(3-phase) 18.5
250 400
30
275 450
37
375 600
45
55
258
300
330
195 385
13
90
500 850 360 378 820
575 885 380 445 855
6
7
2.3
100
250 575
110
4
100
220 435
3.2
15
140
310
350
21
250 535
24
275 615
86
87
4.5
200
300
240
63
39
126 280 266
7
380
380 890
10
207 216 350 335 7.5
300
330
M5
59
197 186 300 285
258
3
5
0
177
11
57
130
450 725 350 325 700
75
78
157
140 280
65.5
240 350 207 216 335 7.5
22
5
59
200 300 197 186 285
11
3
0
30
195 400 385
135
220 450 435
165
250 600 575
210
13
455 1100 350 325 725 700
108
305
4
6
65.5
78
11
100
100
130
59
129
74
186
164
84
248
374 170 544
M6
429 183 612
501 211 712
586 274 860
27
865 352 1217
62
1015 411 1426
94
M10
95
---
150
70
112
24
68
3.2
69 Natural
100
219 113 332
7
2.3
59
1266 505 1771
1588 619 2207
2019 838 2857
M12
0.55
2437 997 3434
2733 1242 3975
14
39
53
17
41
58
36
48
84
59
56
115
80
68
148
70
91
161
5.5
127
82
209
7.5
193 114 307
0.75
157
39
3
157
39
3
1.5
140 280
2.2
3.7
400 V
18.5
(3-phase)
22
5
140 280
59
240 350 207 216 335
275 450 258 220 435
4
65.5
200 300 197 186 285
11
30
7
177
4.0
15
126 266
6
78
7.5
100
10
2.3
90
110
132
160
5
0
200 300 197 186 300 285
21
275 535 258 220 450 435
36
325
M5
59
4
65.5
240 350 207 216 350 335
6
78
7.5
85
100
252 158 410
10
2.3
24
105
450 725 350 325 700
13
3.2
130
500 850 360 370 820
14
575 916 378 445 855
46
88
89
102
426 208 634
M6 466 259 725
678 317 995
Fan
784 360 1144
283 260 550 535
455 1100 350 325 725 700
165
13
105
40
901 415 1316
1203 495 1698
305
96
3.2
130
505 1245 360 370 850 820
15
395
160 579 1324 378 445 916 855
46
408 140
4.5 120
140
715
Natural
326 172 498
635
325 550 283 260 535
55
75
7
177
37
45
126 280 266
Fan
97
M10
122
1399 575 1974
1614 671 2285
2097 853 2950
4.5 130 M12 2388 1002 3390
170
2791 1147 3938
* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.
Table 1.4 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg) of 400V Class Inverters of 185 kW to 300 kW
Voltage
Class
Max.
Applicable
Motor
Output
[kW]
Dimensions (mm)
Open Chassis (IP00)
Caloric Value (W)
W
H
D
W1
W2
W3
H1
H2
D1
t1
710
1305
413
540
240
270
1270
15
125.5
4.5
185
400V
(3-phase)
260
220
300
Approx.
Mass
Mounting
Holes d
280
916
1475
413
730
365
365
1440
15
125.5
4.5
405
M12
External
Internal
Total
Heat
Generation
3237
1372
4609
3740
1537
5277
5838
2320
8158
Cooling
Method
1-10
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Fan
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment.
Table 1.5 Installation Site
Type
Ambient Operating Temperature
Humidity
Enclosed wall-mounted
-10 to + 40 °C
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Open chassis
-10 to + 45 °C
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers
before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally
enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or
other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
• Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
• Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan
or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45°C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter
Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be
reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
1-11
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always
provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
B
A
Air
30 mm min.
50 mm min.
120 mm min.
30 mm min.
Air
Vertical Space
Horizontal Space
A
B
200V class inverter, 0.55 to 90 kW
400V class inverter, 0.55 to 132 kW
50 mm
120 mm
200V class inverter, 110 kW
400V class inverter, 160 to 220 kW
120 mm
120 mm
400V class inverter, 300 kW
300 mm
300 mm
Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted (IP20, NEMA 1) Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of
18.5 kW or less in a panel.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.
1-12
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-E7C25P5 Shown Above)
Inverters of 22 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
Fig 1.12 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-E7C2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Terminal Cover
When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove
on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
1-13
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in
addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the
front cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are described below.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator
and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the following illustration.
2
1
Fig 1.13 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-E7C45P5 Shown Above)
1-14
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in
the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
1
2
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-E7C45P5 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front
cover in reverse order.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of
the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator
After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverter using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in
the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
A
B
Fig 1.15 Mounting the Digital Operator
1-15
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other
than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect
contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front
cover.
1-16
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Inverters of 22 kW or More
For inverters with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and main cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.16 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-E7C2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the
front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is
attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it
clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
1-17
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
1-18
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2
Connection Diagram ....................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration .......................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ......................................2-6
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................ 2-19
Wiring Check .............................................................2-26
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1.
Power supply
Molded-case
circuit breaker
Magnetic contactor (MC)
AC reactor for power
factor improvement
Input noise filter
DC reactor for power
factor improvement
Inverter
Ground
Output noise filter
Motor
Ground
Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
2-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2.
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
DC reactor to improve input
power factor (optional)
U
X
Short-circuit bar
1
1
Main
contactor
2
Fuse
Motor
3-phase power supply L1
380 to 480 V
L2
50/60 Hz
R/L1
S/L2
Line
Filter
L3
U/T1
Varispeed E7
CIMRE7C47P5
T/L3
IM
V/T2
W/T3
PE
2
Multi-function
digital inputs
[Factory settings]
MA
Forward Run/Stop
S1
Reverse Run/Stop
S2
External fault
S3
Fault reset
S4
M1
Multi-step speed setting 1
S5
M2
Multi-step speed setting 2
S6
M3
Jog frequency selection
S7
M4
MB
MC
Fault contact output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
Contact output 1
[Default: During run]
Multi-function digital
output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
Contact output 2
[Default: Zero speed]
SN
SC
SP
E(G)
24V
Shield
terminal
Shield
terminal
E(G)
3
Adjustment
3
2kΩ
1
+V Analog input power supply
+15V, 20mA
A1 Analog Input 1: Master
frequency reference
0 to 10V (20kΩ)
2kΩ
0 to 10V
2
FM
A2 Multi-function analog Input 1:
[Default: Frequency Bias
4 to 20mA (250Ω)]
AC
4 to 20mA
P
Adjustment,
20 kΩ
P
R+
MEMOBUS
communication
RS-485/422
FM
+
Multi-function analog output 1
(0 to 10V, 2mA)
[Default: Output frequency, 0 to 10 V]
Adjustment,
20 kΩ
0V
-V
Analog input power supply
-15V, 20mA
P
-
AM
- AM +
AC
Multi-function analog output 2
(0 to +10V, 2mA)
[Default: Output current, 0 to 10 V]
Terminating
resistance
RS+
P
SIG
Shielded wires
P
Twisted-pair
shielded wires
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-E7C47P5 Shown Above)
2-3
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Circuit Descriptions
Refer to the numbers indicated in Fig 2.2.
➀ These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation.
➁ These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may be interconnected with SELV (or equivalent) or non-SELV circuits,
but not both.
➂ Inverter supplied by four-wire-system source (neutral grounded)
These circuits are SELV circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may only be interconnected with other SELV (or
equivalent) circuits.
Inverter supplied by three-wire-system source (ungrounded or corner grounded)
These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits by protective separation, but only with basic insulation. These circuits must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible, unless they are
isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation.
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
IMPORTANT
2. The output current capability of the +V terminal is 20 mA.
Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (L3-04 = 0) when using a Braking Option. If this user
constant is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop within set deceleration time.
3. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles.
4. The wiring of the digital inputs S1 to S7 is shown for the connection of contacts or NPN transistors (0V
common and sinking mode). This is the default setting.
For the connection of PNP transistors or for using a 24V external power supply, refer to Table 2.13.
5. The master speed frequency reference can be input either at terminal A1 or at terminal A2 by changing
the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is terminal A2.
6. DC reactors to improve the input power factor are built into 200 V Class Inverters from 22 up to 110 kW
and 400 V Class Inverters from 22 up to 300 kW. A DC reactor is an option only for Inverters of 18.5 kW
or less. Remove the short circuit bar when connecting a DC reactor.
2-4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Terminal Block Configuration
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangements are shown in Fig 2.3 and Fig 2.4.
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW)
Control
circuit
terminals
Charge indicator
Main
circuit
terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V/400 V Class Inverter of 22 kW or more)
2-5
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1 to Table 2.3. Refer to instruction manual
TOE-C726-2 for wire sizes for Braking Units and Braking Resistor Units.
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C20P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C20P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C21P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C22P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C23P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C2011
,
E7C2015
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
W/T3
E7C2018
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
W/T3
,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
3.5
(12)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
5.5
(10)
5.5
(10)
M5
2.5
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
M5
2.5
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
14
(6)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
30
(4)
22
(4)
30
(3)
22
(4)
30
(3)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
30 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)
30 to 38
(3 to 2)
22
(4)
30 to 60
(3 to 1)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
2,
2,
2,
2,
3
3
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
E7C2030
1.2 to 1.5
2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
E7C2022
M4
2,
2, U/T1, V/T2,
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
2,
2, U/T1, V/T2,
Possible
Wire Sizes
Terminal
Screws
mm2(AWG)
Wire Type
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V vinyl
power cables
22
(4)
50
(1)
22
(4)
2-6
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
r/l1, ∆/l2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
E7C2037
E7C2045
3
3
r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
E7C2055
3
r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
E7C2075
3
r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
E7C2090
3
r/l1, ∆/l2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
E7C2110
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
r/l1, ∆/l2
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type
60 to 100
60
(2/0 to 4/0)
(2/0)
5.5 to 22
–
(10 to 4)
30 to 60
30
(2 to 2/0)
(2)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
80 to 100
80
(3/0 to 4/0)
(3/0)
5.5 to 22
–
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
38
(1 to 2/0)
(1)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
50 to 100
50 × 2P
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P)
100
100
(4/0)
(4/0)
5.5 to 60
–
(10 to 2/0)
30 to 60
50
(3 to 4/0)
(1/0)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
80 to 125
80 × 2P
(3/0 to 250) (3/0 × 2P)
80 to 100
80 × 2P
(3/0 to 4/0) (3/0 × 2P) Power cables,
5.5 to 60
e.g., 600 V vinyl
–
(10 to 2/0)
power cables
100 to 200
100
(3/0 to 400)
(3/0)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
150 to 200
150 × 2P
(250 to 400) (250 × 2P)
100 to 150
100 × 2P
(4/0 to 300) (4/0 × 2P)
5.5 to 60
–
(10 to 2/0)
60 to 150
60 × 2P
(2/0 to 300) (2/0 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
200 × 2P,
or 50 × 4P
200 to 325
(350 × 2P,
(350 to 600)
or 1/0 ×
2P)
150 × 2P,
or 50 × 4P
150 to 325
(300 × 2P,
(300 to 600)
or 1/0 ×
4P)
5.5 to 60
–
(10 to 2/0)
150
150 × 2P
(300)
(300 × 2P)
0.5 to 5.5
1.25
(20 to 10)
(16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C
2-7
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C40P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C40P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C41P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C42P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C43P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C44P0
,
E7C45P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C47P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
E7C4011
,
E7C4015
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
E7C4018
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
W/T3
E7C4022
E7C4030
,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
M5
2.5
M5
2.5
M5
(M6)
2.5
(4.0 to 5.0)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1,
3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
mm2 (AWG)
5.5(10)
2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1,
3, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
1.2 to 1.5
2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
E7C4037
M4
2,
2, U/T1, V/T2,
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
2,
2,
Possible
Wire Sizes
Terminal
Screws
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8 to 38
(8 to 2)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
14 to 38
(6 to 2)
22
(4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22 to 60
(4 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
5.5
(10)
3.5
(12)
8
(8)
5.5
(10)
8
(8)
5.5
(10)
8
(8)
8
(8)
14
(6)
14
(6)
22
(4)
22
(4)
38
(2)
Wire Type
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V vinyl
power cables
22
(4)
2-8
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2, W/
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
E7C4045
3
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M10
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M10
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M10
31.4 to 39.2
M10
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M10
31.4 to 39.2
M10
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
,
1
3
,
1
3
,
1
3
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
3
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
E7C4160
4.0 to 5.0
M6
3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
E7C4132
M6
9.0 to 10.0
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
E7C4110
9.0 to 10.0
M8
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
E7C4090
M8
9.0 to 10.0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
E7C4075
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
E7C4055
Terminal
Screws
3
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2 (AWG)
38 to 60
(2 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
50 to 100
(1 to 4/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100 to 200
(4/0 to 400)
80 to 200
(3/0 to 400)
80 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type
38
(2)
22
(4)
50
(1)
22
(4)
60
(2/0)
50
(1/0)
38
(2)
1.25
(16)
100
(4/0)
100
(4/0)
50
(1)
Power cables,
1.25
e.g., 600 V vinyl
(16)
power cables
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
600
(2/0)
1.25
(16)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
60 × 2P
(2/0 × 2P)
100
(4/0)
1.25
(16)
100 × 2P
(4/0 × 2P)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
2-9
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
E7C4185
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
M16
78.4 to 98
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
Terminal Symbol
,
1
3
E7C4220
M16
78.4 to 98
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
M16
78.4 to 98
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
M16
78.4 to 98
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
M16
78.4 to 98
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
M4
1.3 to 1.4
,
1
3
E7C4300
,
1
3
r/l1, ∆200/l2200, ∆400/l2400
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2 (AWG)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2
(AWG)
Wire Type
150 × 2P
(300 × 2P)
125 × 2P
(250 × 2P)
325 × 2P
(600 × 2P)
–
100 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P
1.25
(16)
250 × 2P
(500 × 2P)
200 × 2P
(400 × 2P)
125 × 4P
(250 × 4P) Power cables,
e.g., 600 V vinyl
–
125 × 2P power cables
(250 × 2P
1.25
(16)
125 × 4P
(250 × 4P)
125 × 4P
(250 × 2P
125 × 4P
(4/0 × 4P)
200 × 4P
(400 × 4P)
–
125 × 2P
(250 × 2P
1.25
(16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
Table 2.3 Lug Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Wire Thickness (mm2)
0.5
0.75
1.25
2
3.5/5.5
Terminal Screws
Size
M3.5
1.25 / 3.5
M4
1.25 / 4
M3.5
1.25 / 3.5
M4
1.25 / 4
M3.5
1.25 / 3.5
M4
1.25 / 4
M3.5
2 / 3.5
M4
2/4
M5
2/5
M6
2/6
M8
2/8
M4
5.5 / 4
M5
5.5 / 5
M6
5.5 / 6
M8
5.5 / 8
2-10
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Wire Thickness (mm2)
Terminal Screws
Size
M5
8/5
M6
8/6
M8
8/8
M6
14 / 6
M8
14 / 8
M6
22 / 6
M8
22 / 8
M8
38 / 8
M8
60 / 8
M10
60 / 10
8
14
22
30/38
50/60
80
80 / 10
M10
100
100 / 10
100
100 / 12
150
M12
150 / 12
200
200 / 12
325
M12 x 2
325 / 12
M16
325 / 16
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line
voltage drop is calculated as follows:
IMPORTANT
Line voltage drop (V) =
3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Purpose
Main circuit power input
Inverter outputs
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
2022 to 2110
4022 to 4300
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
20P4 to 2018
40P4 to 4018
2022 to 2110
4022 to 4300
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
DC bus terminals
1,
DC reactor connection
1,
Braking Unit connection
3,
Ground
Model: CIMR-F7C
200 V Class
400 V Class
2
2-11
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Table 2.5.
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class
CIMR-E7C20P4 to 4018
Power
supply
Control
circuits
CIMR-E7C2022, 2030
Power
supply
Control
circuits
CIMR-E7C2037 to 2110
Power
supply
Control
circuits
400 V Class
CIMR-E7C40P4 to 4018
Control
circuits
Power
supply
CIMR-E7C4022 to 4055
Power
supply
Control
circuits
CIMR-E7C4075 to 4300
Power
supply
Control
circuits
Note: Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.
2-12
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5. These are the same for both 200 V Class and
400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-E7C20P4 to 2018 and 40P4 to 4018
CIMR-E7C2022, 2030, and 4022 to 4055
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
DC reactor
(optional)
3-phase 200 VAC
(400 VAC)
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
The DC reactor is built in.
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC
reactor.
CIMR-E7C2037 to 2110
CIMR-E7C4075 to 4300
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
3-phase
200 VAC
3-phase
400 VAC
Control power is supplied internally from the DC bus at all inverter models.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
2-13
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing Fuses
To protect the inverter, it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below.
Table 2.6 Input Fuses
Inverter Type
Voltage (V)
FUSE
Current (A)
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
10
10
15
20
30
40
60
80
100
130
150
180
240
300
350
450
550
600
I2t (A2s)
12~25
12~25
23~55
34~98
82~220
220~610
290~1300
450~5000
1200~7200
1800~7200
870~16200
1500~23000
2100~19000
2700~55000
4000~55000
7100~64000
11000~64000
13000~83000
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
480
5
5
10
10
15
20
25
30
50
60
70
80
100
125
150
150
250
300
350
400
450
600
700
900
6~55
6~55
10~55
18~55
34~72
50~570
100~570
100~640
150~1300
400~1800
700~4100
240~5800
500~5800
750~5800
920~13000
1500~13000
3000~55000
3800~55000
5400~23000
7900~64000
14000~250000
20000~250000
34000~400000
52000~920000
2-14
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Installing a Moulded-case Circuit Breaker
When connecting the power input terminals (R/L2, S/L2, and T/L3) to the power supply using a moulded-case
circuit breaker (MCCB) observe that the circuit breaker is suitable for the Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times of the inverter's rated current.
• For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the inverter's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
Installing an Earth Leakage Breaker
Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. If an earth leakage
breaker should be used, select a breaker that detects only the leakage current which is in the frequency range
that is hazardous to humans but not high-frequency leakage currents.
• For a special-purpose earth leakage breaker for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitiv-
ity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.
• When using a general earth leakage breaker, choose one with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more
per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off by a control circuit, a magnetic contactor can be used.
The following things should be considered:
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after
recovery from a power interruption.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of
input power supply is irrelevant to the output phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or a phase advancing
capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the inverter
unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 respective to the motor lead wires U, V, and W.
2-15
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If voltage is applied to the output
terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding may occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor
Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the
Inverter output may overheat and be damaged and may cause other parts to burn.
Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch
Never connect an electromagnetic switch (MC) between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during
operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the
inverter’s overcurrent protection will operate.
When using a MC to switch for instance between two motors, stop the Inverter output before operating the
MC.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay Contact for Motor Protection
This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however,
more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal
relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The control circuit
should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the
main circuit inputs.
2-16
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust
the carrier frequency (set in C6-02) as shown in Table 2.7. (For details, refer to Chapter 5 User Constants.)
Table 2.7 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
Cable length
50 m max.
100 m max.
More than 100 m
Carrier frequency
15 kHz max.
10 kHz max.
5 kHz max.
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that
of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the
length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and
the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
NO
OK
Fig 2.6 Ground Wiring
Connecting a Braking Unit (CDBR) and a Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB)
Connect a Braking Unit and a Braking Resistor Unit to the Inverter as shown in the Fig 2.7.
Table 2.8
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either of them.)
0 (Disable stall prevention function)
The Braking Resistor Unit will not work if L3-04 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration). Hence the deceleration time may be longer than the set time (C1-02/04).
2-17
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
To prevent the braking unit/braking resistor unit from overheating, design the control circuit to turn OFF the
inverter output using the thermal overload relay contacts of the Unit as shown in Fig 2.7.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 0.4 to 18.5 kW Output Capacity
LKEB Braking
Resistor Unit
CDBR Braking
Unit
1
Thermal
protector
trip contact
Inverter
Thermal overload
relay trip contact
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output
LKEB Braking
Resistor Unit
CDBR Braking
Unit
Thermal
protector
trip contact
Inverter
Thermal overload
relay trip contact
Fig 2.7 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and jumper settings like shown in Fig
2.8. There is a jumper for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a master or slave. Select “Master” for
the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second Unit onwards).
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Thermal overload relay contact
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Inverter
Level
detector
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking Unit #2
Braking Unit #3
Thermal overload relay
contact
Thermal overload relay
contact
Braking Unit #1
Thermal overload relay
contact
Fig 2.8 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
2-18
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from main power lines or other control circuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency source (and not from a Digital Operator), used shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield for the largest area of contact between shield and ground. See the figure below for details on the wiring.
E(G)
Shield
terminal
Analog input setting
adjustment
+V
2 kΩ
3
2 kΩ
Analog input power supply
+15V, 20mA
A1 Analog input 1: Master frequency reference
0 to 10V
0 to +10V (20 kΩ)
12
A2
4 to 20mA
P
P
Multi-functions analog input 2 [Default: Frequency bias,
4 to 20mA (250Ω)]
AC
0V
Fig 2.9
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.9.
Table 2.9 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminals
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2(AWG)
0.75
(18)
1.25
(12)
FM, AC, AM, SC, SP,
SN, A1, A2, +V, S1, S2,
S3, S4, S5, S6, S7
MA, MB, MC, M1, M2,
M3, M4,
R+, R-, S+, S-, IG
Phoenix
type
0.5 to 0.6
Single wire*3:
0.14 to 2.5
Stranded
wire:
0.14 to 1.5
(26 to 14)
E (G)
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
0.5 to 2*2
(20 to 14)
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical
Wire or equivalent)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to Table 2.3 Lug Sizes for suitable lug sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
2-19
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.
Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Model
d1
d2
L
0.25 (24)
AI 0.25 - 8YE
0.8
2
12.5
0.5 (20)
AI 0.5 - 8WH
1.1
2.5
14
0.75 (18)
AI 0.75 - 8GY
1.3
2.8
14
1.25 (16)
AI 1.5 - 8BK
1.8
3.4
14
2 (14)
AI 2.5 - 8BU
2.3
4.2
14
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
L
Wire Size mm2 (AWG)
Fig 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Screwdriver
Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit
terminal block
Strip the end for
7 mm if no solderless terminal is
used.
Solderless terminal or wire
without soldering
Wires
3.5 mm max.
Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.11 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
2-20
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.11. Use the appropriate terminals for the
correct purposes.
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals with default settings
Type
Digital
input
signals
Analog
input
signals
No.
Signal Name
Function
S1
Forward run/stop command
Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2
Reverse run/stop command
Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3
External fault input*1
Fault when ON.
S4
Fault reset*
Reset when ON
S5
Multi-step speed reference
1*1
(Master/auxiliary switch)
Auxiliary frequency reference when ON.
S6
Multi-step speed reference
2*1
Multi-step setting 2 when
ON.
S7
Jog frequency reference*1
Jog frequency when ON.
SC
Digital input common
–
–
SN
Digital Input Neutral
–
–
SP
Digital Input Power Supply
+24VDC power supply for digital inputs
24 VDC, 250 mA max. *2
+V
15 V power output
15 V power supply for analog references
15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
A1
Frequency reference
0 to +10 V/100%
0 to +10 V(20 kΩ)
A2
Multi-function analog input
4 to 20 mA/100%
0 V to +10 V/100%
0 to 20 mA/100%
AC
Analog reference common
–
–
E(G)
Shield wire, optional ground
line connection point
–
–
M1
M2
Sequence
output
signals
Running signal
(1NO contact)
Signal Level
Functions are
selected by setting H1-01 to
H1-05.
Function is
selected by setting H3-09.
Operating when ON.
Multi-function
contact outputs
M3
Zero speed
Zero level (b2-01) or
below when ON
Fault output signal
Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC
Fault when OPEN across MB and MC
M4
24 VDC, 8 mA
Photocoupler isolation
4 to 20 mA(250Ω)
0 V to +10 V(20kΩ)
0 to 20 mA (250Ω)
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC*3
MA
MB
–
MC
Analog
output
signals
FM
Multi-function analog output 0 to +10 V/100% fre(frequency output)
quency
Multi-function
analog output 1
AC
Analog common
AM
Multi-function analog output 5 V/Inverter's rated cur(current monitor)
rent
0 to +10 V max. ±5%
2 mA max.
–
Multi-function
analog output 2
2-21
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals with default settings (Continued)
No.
Type
R+
R-
RS485/
422
S+
Signal Name
Function
MEMOBUS communications input
S-
MEMOBUS communications output
IG
Signal common
Signal Level
For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well
as R- and S-.
Differential input, PHC
isolation
Differential input, PHC
isolation
–
–
* 1. The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1
for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
* 2. Do not use this power supply for supplying any external equipment.
* 3. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil with DC power supply, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.12.
Flywheel diode
Coil
External power:
30 VDC max.
The rating of the flywheel diode
must be at least as high as the
circuit voltage.
1 A max.
Fig 2.12 Flywheel Diode Connection
Jumper CN15 and DIP Switch S1
The jumper CN 15 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.
S1
OFF ON
I
V
CN15
CH1
CH2
CH1
CH2
Terminating resistance
Analog input A2 switch
: Factory settings
Analog output switch*
Voltage output
Current output
}
}
I
V
S1
Note: Refer to Table 2.12 for S1
functions.
CN15
Fig 2.13 Jumper CN15 and DIP Switch S1
The functions of DIP switch S1 and jumper CN15 are shown in the following table.
Table 2.12 DIP Switch S1 and jumper CN15
Name
Function
Setting
S1-1
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω
S1-2
Input method for analog input A2
V: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)
I: 0/4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)
CN15CH1*
Multifunction analog output FM voltage/ I: Current output
current switch
V: Voltage output
CN15CH2*
Multifunction analog output AM voltage/ I: Current output
current switch
V: Voltage output
*CN15 is not available on the standard terminal board. An optional terminal board which has this jumper is available.
2-22
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24V
common) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external power supply is also supported, providing more
freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.13 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply – Sinking Mode
External Power Supply – Sinking Mode
External +24V
Internal Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
External Power Supply – Sourcing Mode
External +24V
2-23
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.14.
Varispeed E7
CIMRE7C47P5
Multi-function
contact inputs
(Factory setting)
MA
Forward Run/Stop
S1
Reverse Run/Stop
S2
External fault
S3
Fault reset
S4
M1
Multi-step speed setting 1
S5
M2
Multi-step speed setting 2
S6
M3
Jog frequency selection
S7
M4
MB
MC
Fault contact output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
Contact output 1
(Default : Running)
Contact output 2
(Default : Zero speed)
Multi-function contact
output
250 VAC, 1A max.
30 VDC, 1A max.
SN
SC
SP
E(G)
Analog input
adjustment
2k ohm
0 to 10V
3
2k ohm
A1
Analog Input 1
Master speed reference
0 to +10V (20k ohm)
A2
P
Shield
terminal
Frequency setting power
+15V, 20mA
1
P
Shield
terminal
+V
2
4 to 20mA
24V
AC
-V
E(G)
Adjustment
FM
Multifunction Analog Input 2
[Default: Frequency Bias
4 to 20mA (250 ohm)]
-
R+
MEMOBUS
communication
RS-485/422
Multi-function analogue output 1
(0 to +10V 2mA)
[Default: Output frequency]
Adjustment
0V
AM
AC
P
FM
+
-
AM
+
Multi-function analogue output 2
(0 to +10V 2mA)
[Default: Output current]
Terminating
resistance
RS+
P
SIG
Shielded wires
P
Twisted-pair
Shielded wires
Fig 2.14 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
2-24
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
,
1,
2, and
3) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, and M4 (contact outputs) from
wiring to other control circuit terminals.
• If using an optional external power supply, it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
• Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults.
• Ground the cable shields so as to maximise the contact area of the shield and ground.
• Cable shields have to be grounded on both cable ends.
2-25
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform continuity check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring.
• Is all wiring correct?
• Have no wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
• Are all screws tight?
• Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
2-26
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operator and Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of
operating modes and switching between modes.
Digital Operator.............................................................3-2
Modes ...........................................................................3-4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Drive Mode Indicators
FWD:
Lights up when a forward run command is
input.
REV:
Lights up when a reverse run command is
input.
SEQ:
Lights up when the run command from the
control circuit terminal is enabled.
REF:
Lights up when the frequency reference from
control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lights up when an error or alarm has
occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, constant numbers, and
settings.
Mode Display
DRIVE: Lights up in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lights up in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV:
Lights up in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lights up in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE:Lights up in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user constants, monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Key
Name
Function
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and
control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant o2-01.
MENU Key
Selects modes.
ESC Key
Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
3-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operator
Table 3.1 Key Functions (Continued)
Key
Name
Function
JOG Key
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
Digital Operator.
FWD/REV Key
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being
operated from the Digital Operator.
Shift/RESET Key
Sets the active digit when programming user constants.
Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred.
Increment Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and increments set
values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Decrement Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and decrements set
values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
DATA/ENTER Key
Pressed to enter menu items, user constants, and set values.
Also used to switch from one screen to another.
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by
the Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops Inverter operation.
This key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control
circuit terminal by setting user constant o2-02.
Note: Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to the Key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators
will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN key indicator will flash and the STOP key indicator will light during initial excitation or DC brake.
The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP keys and the Inverter status is shown in Fig
3.2.
Inverter output frequency
Frequency setting
: Light up : Blinking
: Not light up
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
3-3
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's user constants and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user constants.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.2.
Table 3.2 Modes
Mode
Primary function(s)
Drive mode
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Quick programming mode
Use this mode to read and set the basic user constants to operate the Inverter.
Advanced programming mode
Use this mode to reference and set all user constants.
Verify mode
Use this mode to read/set user constants that have been changed from their factoryset values.
Autotuning mode
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor constants. During Autotuning the line-to-line resistance is measured and set automatically.
3-4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Modes
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.
Press the DATA/ENTER key from the mode selection display to monitor data and from a monitor display to
access the setting display.
Power ON
Drive Mode
(Operation possible)
Quick
Programming Mode
Advanced
Programming Mode
Verify Mode
When returning from a setting
display, the rightmost digit
of the monitor display will
flash.
Autotuning
Mode
If a user constant is changed
the number will be displayed.
Mode Selection Displays
Monitor Displays
Light up
Blinking
Setting Displays
Not light up
Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions
3-5
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Drive Mode
The Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in drive mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as
fault information and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be
written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the
setting.
Example Operations
Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display
Drive Mode
Monitor Constant Display Deleted Monitor Constant
Display
Power On
Frequency reference
Monitor Display
Frequency reference setting/
display unit 01-03
Output frequency
Output current
Monitor setting for o1-01
Status Monitor
Frequency reference
Fan operating time
Fault Trace
Current error
Operating time at error
Fault History
1st previous error
Operating time at 4th
previous error
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode
The first monitor constant (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON. The monitor
item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
IMPORTANT
3-6
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Modes
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the constants required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to
change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display
Monitor Display
Quick Programming Mode
Reference selection
Setting Display
Operation method selection
Stopping method selection
C1-01: Acceleration time 1
C1-02: Deceleration time 1
C6-02: Carrier frequency
selection
d1-01: Frequency reference 1
d1-02: Frequency reference 2
d1-03: Frequency reference 3
d1-04: Frequency reference 4
d1-17: Jog frequency reference
AO CH1 output gain
E1-01: Input voltage setting
E1-03: V/f pattern selection
E1-04: Max. output frequency
E1-05: Max. voltage
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-09: Min. output frequency
E2-01: Motor rated current
AO CH2 output gain
Motor protection selection
Deceleration stall selection
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
3-7
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Advanced Programming Mode
In advanced programming mode all Inverter constants can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to
change the constant. The user constant will be written and the display will return to monitor display when the
DATA/ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants.
Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display
Advanced Programming Mode
Function Selection Display
Setup settings: A1-xx
Monitor Display
Setting Display
Language
Access level
Initialize
PI control: b5-xx
PI control mode selection
Proportional gain
PI feedback command
loss detection time
Copy functions: 03-xx
Copy function selection
Read permitted selection
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
3-8
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Modes
Setting User Constants
Here the procedure to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s is shown.
Table 3.3 Setting User Constants in Advanced Programming Mode
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Description
1
Power supply turned ON.
2
MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode.
3
MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming mode.
4
MENU Key pressed to enter advanced programming mode.
5
DATA/ENTER pressed to access monitor display.
6
Increment or Decrement Key pressed to display C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
7
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to access setting
display. The setting of C1-01 (10.00) is displayed.
8
Shift/RESET Key pressed to move the flashing
digit to the right.
9
Increment Key pressed to change set value to
20.00 s.
10
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to enter the set
data. “END” is displayed for 10 s and then the
entered value is displayed for 0.5 s.
11
The monitor display for C1-01 returns.
3-9
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any constants that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming
modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to change the settings. The user constant will be
written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER key is pressed.
Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their
default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting),
and E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Mode Selection Display
Monitor Display
Setting Display
Verify Mode
Frequency reference
selection
Frequency reference
selection
Acceleration time 1
Acceleration time 1
Input voltage setting
Input voltage setting
Motor rated current
Motor rated current
Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Mode
3-10
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Modes
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically measures and sets the motor line-to-line resistance of the motor and motor cable to
compensate the voltage drop and thereby to achieve the best performance.
Example of Operation
Set the motor rated output power (in kW) and the motor rated current, specified on the motor nameplate and
then press the RUN key. The motor is automatically run and the line-to-line resistance is measured.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET keys to
change the setting. The user constant will be written and the display will be returned to monitor display when
the DATA/ENTER key is pressed.
The following example shows the autotuning procedure.
Autotuning Monitor Display
Autotuning
Setting Display
Motor output power
Motor output power
Motor rated current
Motor rated current
Autotuning start*
Autotuning
Stop command input
Autotuning completed
Fig 3.8 Operation in Autotuning Mode
If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT
3-11
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
3-12
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example
of trial operation.
Trial Operation Procedure............................................4-2
Trial Operation .............................................................4-3
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................ 4-11
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Trial Operation Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart.
START
Installation
Wiring
*1
Set power supply voltage.
Turn ON power
Confirm status
Select operating
method.
Basic settings
(Quick programming mode)
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200V/50Hz (400V/50Hz)
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly
causing motor to stall or
overload?
NO
YES
Stationary autotuning for
line-to-line resistance only
Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)
No-load operation
*1. Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 75 kW or more.
Loaded operation
Optimum adjustments and
constant settings
Check/record constants.
END
Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
4-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Trial Operation
Trial Operation
The procedure for the trial operation is described in order in this section.
Application Confirmation
First, confirm the application before using the Inverter. It is designed for:
• Fan, blower, pump
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper
(400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher)
The power supply voltage jumper must be set for 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or higher. Insert the jumper
into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the
following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Connector
Jumper (factory-set position)
200 V class power supply
400V class power supply
Power supply input terminals
CHARGE indicator
Fig 4.2 Power Supply Voltage Setting
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VDC, 50/60 Hz
• Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
• Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
• Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
• Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status) if possible.
4-3
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Checking the Display Status
After normal power up without any faults the operator display will show the following:
Display for normal operation
The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.
When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case,
refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
Display for fault operation
The display will differ depending on the
type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
4-4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Trial Operation
Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (the QUICK indicator on the Digital Operator should light) and then
set the following user constants.
Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures. Find a list of the
Quick Programming Parameters on Page 5-4 and details of the parameters in Chapter 6 Constant Settings by
Function.
4-5
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Selecting the V/f pattern
• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to D) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Simple operaton of a general-purpose motor E1-03 = 0 or F (default)
at 50 Hz:
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting
from E1-04 to E1-13 are for 50 Hz
• It is recommended to perform non-rotating autotuning for the line-to-line resistance if the motor cable is 50
m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling.
4-6
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Trial Operation
Autotuning
Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance
Autotuning can be used to improve the performance when very long motor cables are used or when motor and
inverter have different power ratings.
To perform autotuning set T1-02 (Motor rated power) and T1-04 (Motor rated current) and then press the
RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the non-rotating motor for approximately
20 seconds and the line-to-line resistance and motor + cable resistance will be automatically measured
Power will be supplied to the motor during autotuning but the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor
until autotuning has been completed.
IMPORTANT
Constant Settings for Autotuning
The following constants must be set before autotuning.
Table 4.1 Constant Settings before Autotuning
Constant
Number
Name
Display
T1-02
Motor output power
Set the output power of the motor in
Kilowatts.*1
10% to 200%
Same as
of Inverter
Inverter
rated output rated output
Set the rated current of the motor in
Amps.*1
Same as
generalpurpose
motor with
same
capacity as
Inverter
T1-04
Motor rated
current
Setting
Range
10% to 200%
of Inverter
rated current
Factory
Setting
* 1. For a constant-output motor, set the value at the base speed.
4-7
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning.
Table 4.2 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
Digital Operator Display
Description
Motor rated : T1-02
The autotuning start display will appear when all settings through T1-04 have been completed. The
A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.
Autotuning started: TUn10
Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed
from the autotuning start display.
Autotuning
Stop command input
If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error
occurs during autotuning, and error message will be
display and autotuning will be stopped.
Refer to Errors During Autotuning on page 7-10.
Autotuning completed
END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 minutes, indicating that autotuning has been completed.
4-8
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Trial Operation
Application Settings
User constants can be set as required in advanced programming mode (i.e. the ADV indicator lights on the
Digital Operator). All the constants that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set
in advanced programming mode.
Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
• To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation or to 3
for output phase rotation and reverse disabled.*
• To increase the speed of a 50 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 55.0 Hz.
• To use a 0 to 10 V analog signal for a 50 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 45 Hz (0%
to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
• To limit the speed range between 20% and 80% set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
No-load Operation
This section describes trial operation in which the motor is in no-load state, that means the machine is not connected to the motor. To avoid failures caused due to the wiring of the control circuit it’s recommended to use
the LOCAL mode. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the
SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter. For applications, at which the machine can be driven in one direction only, check the motor rotation direction.
Operation with Jog frequency reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and
releasing the JOG key on the Digital Operator. If the external control circuit prevents operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then
start operation in REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminal).
Both, a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed command) must
be provided to start Inverter operation.
Loaded Operation
Connecting the Load
• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
• Be sure to tighten all the screws when connecting the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
* Setting 3 for b1-04 will be available in future software versions. For details please contact your Yaskawa representative.
4-9
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operation using the Digital Operator
• Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
• For the case that a fault occurs during operation, make sure that the STOP key on the Digital Operator is
easily accessible.
• At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed, e.g. to one tenth of the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status
• Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow
speed, increase the frequency reference.
• After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnor-
mal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too
high.
• Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-11 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originated by the
control system occur.
Check and Recording User Constants
Use verify mode (i.e., when the VERIFY indicator on the Digital Operator lights up) to check user constants
that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user constant table.
Any user constants that have been changed by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function in constants o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be
used to copy the changed settings from the inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system
recovery if for any reason the inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage user constants.
• Recording user constants
• Setting access levels for user constants
• Setting a password
Recording User Constants (o2-03)
If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user constants will be saved in a separate
memory area in the inverter. When the Inverter settings have been changed for any reason, the user constants
can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110.
User Constant Access Levels (A1-01)
A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user constants from being changed. A1-01 can also be set
to 1 (User-specified Constants) to display only constants required by the machine or application in a programming mode. These constants can be determined by setting the A2-XX constants.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)
When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user constants will
be displayed only when the correct password has been input.
4-10
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Adjustment Suggestions
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originated by the control system occur during trial operation,
adjust the constants listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the
most commonly used user constants only.
Table 4.3 Adjusted User Constants
Name (Constant
Number)
Performance
Factory Setting
Recommended
Setting
Adjustment Method
0.50 to 2.00
• Reduce the setting if torque is
insufficient for heavy loads.
• Increase the setting if hunting
or vibration occurs for light
loads.
Hunting-prevention
gain (N1-02)
Controlling hunting
and vibration in mid1.00
dle-range speeds (10 to
40 Hz)
Carrier frequency
selection
(C6-02)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting
and vibration at low
speeds
Depends on
capacity
0 to
default
• Increase the setting if motor
magnetic noise is high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or
vibration occurs at low to middle-range speeds.
Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant (C4-02)
• Increasing torque
and speed response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
Depends on
capacity
200 to 1000
ms
• Reduce the setting if torque or
speed response is slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting
or vibration occurs.
Torque compensation
gain (C4-01)
• Improving torque at
low speeds (10 Hz
or lower)
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
0.50 to 1.50
• Increase the setting if torque is
insufficient at low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or
vibration occurs for light loads.
Middle output frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Improving torque at
Depends on
low speeds
capacity and
• Controlling shock at
voltage
startup
Default to
Default + 3
to 5 V*
• Increase the setting if torque is
insufficient at low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if shock at
startup is large.
1.00
* The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
The following user constants will also affect the control system indirectly.
Table 4.4 Constants Affecting Control and Applications Indirectly
Name (Constant Number)
Application
Acceleration/deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-11)
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 and C2-02)
Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04)
Used to avoid resonance points during acceleration or deceleration.
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12)*
Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06)
Used to prevent OV (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy
loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by
default and the setting normally has not to be changed. When using an
optional braking resistor unit and braking unit, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to 0.
* Will be available in future software versions. For details please contact your Yaskawa representative.
4-11
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
4-12
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constants
This chapter describes all user constants that can be set in the Inverter.
User Constant Descriptions .........................................5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........5-3
User Constant Tables ................................................5-10
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user constant tables.
Description of User Constant Tables
User constant tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as
an example.
Constant
Number
b1-01
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Reference selection
Sets the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
Factory
Setting
1
Change
MEMOduring Access
BUS
Page
Opera- Level
Register
tion
No
Q
180H
–
• Constant Number:
The number of the user constant.
• Name:
The name of the user constant.
• Description:
Details on the function or settings of the user constant.
• Setting Range:
The setting range for the user constant.
• Factory Setting:
The default setting of the user constant.
• Change during Operation:
Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes are possible during operation.
No:
• Access Level:
Changes are not possible during operation.
Indicates the constant access level in which the constant can be
changed or monitored.
Q:
Quick programming mode and advanced programming mode.
A:
Advanced programming mode only.
• MEMOBUS Register:
The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
• Page:
Reference page for more detailed information about the constant.
5-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
MENU
Drive Mode
Inverter can be operated and
its status can be displayed.
No.
Function
Page
U1
Status Monitor Constants
5-42
U2
Fault Trace
5-45
U3
Fault History
5-46
A1
Initialize Mode
5-10
A2
User-specified Setting Mode
5-11
b1
Operation Mode Selections
5-12
b2
DC Injection Braking
5-13
Quick Programming Mode
b3
Speed Search
5-14
Minimum constants required
for operation can be monitored
or set.
b4
Timer Function
5-15
b5
PI Control
5-15
b8
Energy Saving
5-17
C1
Acceleration/Deceleration
5-18
C2
S-curve Acceleration
5-18
C4
Torque Compensation
5-19
C6
Carrier Frequency
5-20
d1
Preset Reference
5-21
d2
Reference Limits
5-21
d3
Jump Frequencies
5-22
d4
Reference Frequency Hold
5-22
E1
V/f Pattern
5-23
E2
Motor Setup
5-24
F6
Communications Option Card
5-25
H1
Multi-function Digital Inputs
5-26
H2
Multi-function Digital Outputs
5-27
Verify Mode
H3
Multi-function Analog Inputs
5-28
Constants changed from the
default settings can be monitored or set.
H4
Multi-function Analog Outputs
5-29
H5
MEMOBUS Communications
5-31
L1
Motor Overload
5-32
L2
Power Loss Ridethrough
5-33
L3
Stall Prevention
5-34
L4
Reference Detection
5-35
L5
Fault Restart
5-35
L6
Torque Detection
5-36
L8
Hardware Protection
5-37
N1
Hunting Prevention Function
5-38
N3
High-slip Braking
5-38
o1
Monitor Select
5-39
o2
Multi-function Selections
5-40
o3
Copy Function
5-41
T
Motor Autotuning
5-42
Advanced Programming Mode
All constants can be monitored
or set.
Autotuning Mode
Automatically measures the
line-to-line resistance.
5-3
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constants Setable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user constants required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming
mode. The user constants displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and
all other user constants, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Used to select the language displayed on
the Digital Operator JVOP-160 only.
0: English
1: Japanese
Language selec- 2: German
A1-00 tion for Digital
3: French
0 to 6
Operator display 4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This constant is not changed by the initialize operation.
Factory
Setting
MEMOChange
BUS
during Access
Opera- Level
Registion
ter
0
Yes
A
100H
Sets the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
180H
Sets the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
RUN command 1: Control circuit terminal (digital multib1-02
source selection
function inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
181H
Select stopping method when stop command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
Stopping
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than
b1-03
method selection
coast to stop, without regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
commands are disregarded during
deceleration time.)
0 to 3
0
No
Q
182H
Prohibition of
b1-04 reverse operation
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
2: Output Phase Rotation (both rotational
directions are enabled)
3: Output Phase Rotation with Reverse
prohibited.
0 to 3
0
No
A
183H
Timer function
ON-delay time
Sets the timer function output ON-delay
time (dead time) for the timer function
input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in
H1- and H2-.
0.0 to
3000.0
0.0 s
No
A
1A3H
0: Disabled
PI control mode 1: Enabled
b5-01
selection
3: PI control enabled (frequency reference
+ PI output)
0, 1, 3
0
No
A
1A5H
b1-01
b4-01
Reference
source selection
5-4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Constant
Number
Name
b5-02
Proportional
gain (P)
MEMOChange
BUS
during Access
Opera- Level
Registion
ter
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets P-control proportional gain.
P-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.
0.00
to
25.00
1.00
Yes
A
1A6H
Sets I-control integral time in 1-second
units.
b5-03 Integral (I) time
I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0.
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s
Yes
A
1A7H
b5-04 Integral (I) limit
Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of
the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
1A8H
b5-06 PI limit
Sets the limit after PI-control as a percent- 0.0 to
age of the maximum output frequency.
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
1AAH
b5-07
Sets the offset after PI-control as a perPI offset adjustcentage of the maximum output frement
quency.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
1ABH
b5-08
PI delay time
constant
Sets the time constant for low pass filter
for PI-control outputs in 1-second units.
Usually not necessary to set.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
1ACH
Selects forward/reverse direction for PI
PI output charoutput.
b5-09 acteristics selec0: PI output is forward.
tion
1: PI output is reverse
0 or 1
0
No
A
1ADH
b5-10 PI output gain
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No
A
1AEH
0: Limit to 0 when PI output is negative.
1: Reverses when PI output is negative.
PI reverse output
b5-11
Limit to 0 is also active when reverse pro- 0 or 1
selection
hibit is selected by
b1-04.
0
No
A
1AFH
0 to 2
0
No
A
1B0H
b5-13
Sets the PI feedback loss detection level
PI feedback loss
as percentage using the maximum output 0 to 100
detection level
frequency as 100%.
0%
No
A
1B1H
b5-14
PI feedback loss
Sets the PI feedback loss detection time.
detection time
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s
No
A
1B2H
b5-15
Sleep function
operation level
Sets the sleep function start level as a frequency.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
1B3H
b5-16
Sleep operation Sets the delay time until the sleep function
delay time
starts.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
1B4H
b5-17
Accel/decel time Sets the accel/decel time for the PI Softfor PI reference starter (SFS).
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
1B5H
b5-18
PI Setpoint
Selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 to 1
0
No
A
1DCH
PI-target value
0.00 to
100.00
%
0
Yes
A
1DDH
Selection of PI
b5-12 feedback signal
loss detection
b5-19 PI Setpoint
Sets output gain.
0: No detection of PI feedback loss.
1: Detection of PI feedback loss.
Operation continues during detection,
the fault contact is not operated.
2: Detection of PI feedback loss.
The motor coasts to stop at detection,
and the fault contact operates.
5-5
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Constant
Number
MEMOChange
BUS
during Access
Opera- Level
Registion
ter
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 to
39999
0
No
A
1E2H
Sleep Function
Selection
Sets the operation method of the PI sleep
function
0: Output frequency before Softstarter
(SFS)
1: Frequency reference/PI target
2: Snooze
0 to 2
0
No
A
1E3H
b5-22 Snooze Level
Sets the frequency level at which the
snooze operation starts as percentage of
the max. output frequency.
0 to
100%
0
Yes
A
1E4H
Sets a delay timer for the snooze function
0 to
3600 s
0s
No
A
1E5H
b5-24 Wake-Up Level
Sets the feedback level at which the
0 to 100
inverter wakes up from snooze operation.
%
0
No
A
1E6H
b5-25 Setpoint Boost
Sets the PI setpoint boost when the snooze
mode is activated. If it is reached once the
output will be switched off. The value is
set as percentage of the PI setpoint.
0 to
100%
0
No
A
1E7H
Maximum Boost Sets the maximum time the boost operaTime
tion is performed.
0 to
3600 s
0s
No
A
1E8H
PI Snooze function will only be activated
when the feedback value is above this
b5-27 Snooze feedback parameter setting.
The value is set as percentage of the PI
setpoint.
0 to
100%
60%
No
A
1E9H
PI Feedback
b5-28 Square Root
Operation
Enables or disables the square root operation for the PI feedback value.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1
0
No
A
1EAH
PI Feedback
b5-29 Square Root
Gain
Sets the gain for the feedback when
square root operation is enabled.
0 to
2.00
1.00
No
A
1EBH
0 or 1
0
No
A
1ECH
0 or 1
0
No
A
1CCH
Name
Description
Sets the unit for b5-19, U1-38 and U1-24
0: 0.01 Hz
1: 0.01% (the maximum output frequency
E1-04 is taken as 100%.
2 – 39: rpm, set value is equal to motor
poles
PI Setpoint Scal- 40 – 39999: User desired display
b5-20
ing
Sets the display value
for 100 %.
Sets the number of
decimal digits.
b5-21
b5-23
b5-26
Snooze Delay
Time
Selects whether the PI output monitor is
PI Output Moni- shown as square root value or not.
b5-30
tor Square Root 0: Disable
1: Enable
Energy-saving
b8-01
mode selection
Select whether to enable or disable
energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
5-6
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Constant
Number
Name
C1-01
Acceleration
time 1
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate
from 0 Hz to the maximum output frequency.
Deceleration
C1-02
time 1
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate
from the maximum output frequency to
0 Hz.
Description
Setting
Range
0.0 to
6000.0
Factory
Setting
MEMOChange
BUS
during Access
Opera- Level
Registion
ter
Yes
Q
200H
Yes
Q
201H
10.0 s
d2-01
Sets the frequency reference upper limit
Frequency referas a percentage of the max. output freence upper limit
quency.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
No
A
289H
d2-02
Sets the frequency reference lower limit
Frequency referas a percentage of the maximum output
ence lower limit
frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
28AH
E1-01
Input voltage
setting
155 to
255
200 V
No
Q
300H
No
Q
30EH
No
A
3A2H
Yes
A
411H
0.0%
Yes
A
412H
Gain (terminal
H3-10
A2)
Sets the input level when terminal A2
input is 10 V (20 mA) according to the
0.0 to
100.0%
100% value of the function set in constant 1000.0
H3-09.
Yes
A
419H
Bias (terminal
H3-11
A2)
Sets the input level when terminal A2 is
0 V (4 mA/0 mA) according to the 100%
value of the function set in constant
H3-09.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
41AH
Momentary
L2-01 power loss
detection
0: Disabled (DC bus undervoltage (UV1)
detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the power
returns within the time set in L2-02.
When L2-02 is exceeded, DC bus
undervoltage is detected.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operating.
(Restarts when power returns during
control operations. Does not detect DC
bus undervoltage.)
0 to 2
0
No
A
485H
Momentary
Ridethrough time, when Momentary
L2-02 power loss ride- Power Loss Selection (L2-01) is set to 1,
thru time
in units of seconds.
0 to 2.0
No
A
486H
Sets the inverter input voltage. This set
value will be the basis for the protection
functions.
*2
Sets the motor rated current in Amps.
0.32 to
Motor rated cur- This set value becomes the base value for
E2-01
6.40
rent
motor protection and torque limit. It is an
*5
input data for autotuning.
Set the stopping method for communications errors.
Operation selec- 0: Deceleration to stop using the
tion after comdeceleration time in C1-02
F6-01
munications
1: Coast to stop
error
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration
time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
*2
1.90 A
*4
1
H3-02
Gain (terminal
A1)
Sets the frequency as a percentage of the0.0 to
100.0%
maximum output frequency, when 10 V is
1000.0
input.
H3-03
Bias (terminal
A1)
Sets the frequency as a percentage of the
maximum frequency, when 0 V is inut.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.1 s
*1
5-7
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Constant
Number
MEMOChange
BUS
during Access
Opera- Level
Registion
ter
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0: Stop (Operation follows the frequency
reference.)
1: Operation continues at the frequency,
set in parameter L4-06.
Frequency reference loss means that the
frequency reference value drops over
90% in 400 ms.
0 or 1
1
No
A
49DH
Frequency reference value at
Sets the frequency reference value when
L4-06
frequency refer- the frequency reference is missing
ence loss
0.0 to
100.0%
80%
No
A
4C2H
Sets the number of auto restart attempts.
Number of auto Automatically restarts after a fault and
L5-01
restart attempts conducts a speed search from the run frequency.
0 to 10
0
No
A
49EH
0.5 to
180.0
10.0s
No
A
4A0H
0: Overtorque/undertorque detection
disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only with speed
agreement; operation continues
(warning is output).
2: Overtorque detected continuously
during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
3: Overtorque detection only with speed
agreement; output stopped upon
detection.
4: Overtorque detected continuously
Torque detection
during operation; output stopped upon
L6-01
selection
detection.
5: Undertorque detection only with speed
agreement; operation continues
(warning is output).
6: Undertorque detected continuously
during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
7: Undertorque detection only with speed
agreement; output stopped upon
detection.
8: Undertorque detected continuously
during operation; output stopped upon
detection.
0 to 8
6
No
A
4A1H
L6-02
Torque detection
Inverter rated current is set as 100%.
level
0 to 300
15%
No
A
4A2H
L6-03
Torque detection Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection
time
time.
0.0 to
10.0
10.0 s
No
A
4A3H
L8-11
Set the time in seconds to delay turning
Cooling fan conOFF the cooling fan after the inverter
trol delay time
STOP command is given.
0 to 300
300 s
No
A
4B7H
6
Yes
A
500H
Name
Operation when
L4-05 frequency reference is missing
L5-03 Fault Retry time
Monitor seleco1-01
tion
Sets the maximum time, the restart is
tried.
Set the number of the 3rd. monitor item to
be displayed in the Drive Mode (U16 to 53
).
(Not on LCD operator.)
5-8
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Constant
Number
Description
Factory
Setting
o1-05 LCD-Focus
Sets the brightness on the optional LCD
operator (JVOP-160).
0: light
1:
2:
3: normal
4:
5: dark
0 to 5
3
Yes
A
509H
o1-07
2nd Monitor
Selection *6
Selects the monitor that is displayed and
locked in the second line of the operator
display
1 to 53
2
No
A
518H
o1-08
3rd Monitor
Selection *6
Selects the monitor that is displayed and
locked in the third line of the operator dis- 1 to 53
play
3
No
A
519H
User constant
initial value
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set
constants as user initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded user
initial values)
When the set constants are recorded as
user initial values, 1110 will be set in
A1-03.
0 to 2
0
No
A
507H
When the frequency reference is set on
the Digital Operator frequency reference
monitor, sets whether the Enter key is
Frequency refer- necessary or not.
o2-05 ence setting
0: Enter key needed
0 or 1
method selection 1: Enter key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without Enter key operation.
0
No
A
509H
o2-03
Name
Cumulative
o2-08 operation time
selection
o3-02
*
*
*
*
*
*
MEMOChange
BUS
during Access
Opera- Level
Registion
ter
Setting
Range
Read permission selection
0: Cumulative time when the Inverter
power is on. (All time while the
Inverter power is on is accumulated.)
1: Cumulative Inverter run time. (Only
Inverter output time is accumulated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
50CH
0: READ prohibited
1: READ permitted
0 or 1
0
No
A
516H
1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity.
2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
3. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
4. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
5. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
6. Parameter is only effective if HOA operator with LCD (JVOP-162) is used.
5-9
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
A: Setup Settings
Initialize Mode: A1
Constant
Number
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Language selecA1-00 tion for Digital
Operator display
Used to select the language displayed on the Digital Operator
JVOP-160 only.
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This constant is not changed by the
initialize operation.
0 to 6
0
Yes
A
100H
–
Constant access
level
Used to set the constant access level
(set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring
drive mode and setting A1-01
and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01 to
A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and set in
both, quick programming mode
(Q) and advanced programming
(A) mode.)
0 to 2
2
Yes
A
101H
6-109
6-110
A1-03 Initialize
Used to initialize the constants
using the specified method.
0:
No initializing
1110: Initializes using the user
constants that have been
stored before using o2-03
parameter
2220: Initializes using a two-wire
sequence. (Initializes to the
factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a threewire sequence.
0 to
3330
0
No
A
103H
–
A1-04 Password
Password input when a password
has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects constants of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed, A1-01
to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 constants can only be changed after
inputting the right password.
0 to
9999
0
No
A
104H
6-109
A1-01
Name
5-10
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Used to set a four digit number as
the password.
Usually this constant is not displayed. When the password (A104) is displayed, hold down the
RESET key and press the Menu key
and A1-05 will be displayed.
0 to
9999
0
Name
A1-05 Password setting
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
No
A
105H
6-109
User-set Constants: A2
The constants set by the user are listed in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
A2-01
User specified
to
constants
A2-32
Description
Setting
Range
Used to select the function for each
of the user specified constants. User
b1-01 to
constants are the only accessable
o2-08
constants if Constant Access Level
is set to user constants (A1-01=1)
Factory
Setting
–
MEMOChange
during Access BUS
Page
Opera- Level Registion
ter
No
A
106H to
6-110
125H
5-11
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Application Constants: b
Operation Mode Selections: b1
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Sets the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
Reference source
b1-01
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
selection
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Sets the run command input
method.
0: Digital Operator
RUN command
b1-02
1: Control circuit terminal (digital
source selection
multifunktion inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Used to set the stopping method
used when a stop command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
Stopping method 2: DC injection braking stop (Stops
b1-03
selection
faster than coast to stop, no
regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
commands are disregarded
during deceleration.)
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
2: Output Phase Rotation (both
Prohibition of
b1-04
rotational directions are enabreverse operation
led)
3: Output Phase Rotation with
Reverse prohibited.
Used to set the operation mode by
switching to the Remote mode
using the Local/Remote Key.
Operation selec0: Run signals that are input during
tion after switchmode switching are disregarded.
b1-07
ing to remote
(Input Run signals after
mode
switching the mode.)
1: Run signals become effective
immediately after switching to
the Remote mode.
Used to set an operation interlock in
programming modes.
Run command
0: Cannot operate.
b1-08 selection in pro1: Can operate (Disabled when
gramming modes
Digital Operator is set to select
run command (when b1-02 =
0)).
Sets the delay time for the internal
b1-11 RUN delay
RUN command.
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 to 3
1
No
Q
180H
6-5
6-51
0 to 3
1
No
Q
181H
6-9
6-51
0 to 3
0
No
Q
182H
6-11
0 to 3
0
No
A
183H
6-37
0 or 1
0
No
A
186H
–
0 or 1
0
No
A
187H
–
0 to
600s
0s
No
A
1DFH
–
5-12
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the source of frequency reference for HAND operation.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control Circuit Terminal (analog input)
0 or 1
0
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
DC injection
b2-01 braking starting
frequency
Used to set the frequency at which
DC injection braking starts in units
of Hz when b1-03 is set to 0 (deceleration to stop).
When b2-01 is less than E1-09, E109 becomes the DC injection braking starting frequency.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
No
A
189H
6-11
DC injection
braking current
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the inverter
rated current.
0 to
100
50%
No
A
18AH
6-11
6-14
DC injection
b2-03 braking time at
start
Used to set the time to perform DC
injection braking at start in units of
1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and
restart it. When the set value is 0,
DC injection braking at start is not
performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
No
A
18BH
6-14
DC injection
b2-04 braking time at
stop
Used to set the time to perform DC
injection braking at stop in units of
1 second.
0.00
Used to prevent coasting after the
to
stop command is input. When the
10.00
set value is 0.00, DC injection braking at stop is not performed.
0.50 s
No
A
18CH
6-11
Motor pre-heat
current
Sets the DC current level when the
motor pre-heat function is enabled 0 to 100
using a digital input.
0%
No
A
IE1H
6-14
b1-12
Name
HAND Fref
Source
No
A
0IE0
–
DC Injection Braking: b2
Constant
Number
b2-02
b2-09
Name
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
5-13
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Speed Search: b3
Constant
Number
MEMOChange
during Access BUS
Page
Opera- Level Registion
ter
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 to 3
2
No
A
191H
6-39
Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking the
Speed search
Inverter rated current as 100%.
b3-02 operating current
Usually not necessary to set. When
(current detection)
restarting is not possible with the
factory settings, reduce the value.
0 to
200
120%
No
A
192H
6-39
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search in 1Speed search
second units.
b3-03 deceleration time
Sets the time for deceleration from
(current detection)
the maximum output frequency to
the minimum output frequency.
0.1 to
10.0
2.0 s
No
A
193H
6-39
When a speed search is performed
after recovering from a momentary
Speed search wait power loss, the search operation is
time (current
delayed for the time set here.
b3-05
detection or speed If e.g. a contactor is used at the outcalculation)
put side of the inverter set this constant to the contactor delay time or
more.
0.0 to
20.0
0.2 s
No
A
195H
6-39
Can be used to turn off the bi-directional capabilities of the speed calculation form of speed search.
Then speed search will only be per- 0 or 1
formed in the last known direction.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
No
A
19EH
6-39
Name
Description
Enables/disables the speed search
function for the RUN command and
sets the speed search method.
0:Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the
Speed search
motor speed is calculated and
selection (current
b3-01
acceleration/deceleration is
detection or speed
performed from the calculated
calculation)
speed to the specified frequency
(motor direction is also searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started from
the frequency when power was
momentarily lost and the
maximum frequency, and the
speed is detected at the search
current level.
Bi-directional
b3-14 speed search
selection
5-14
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Timer Function: b4
Constant
Number
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Timer function
ON-delay time
Sets the timer function output ONdelay time (dead time) for the timer
0.0 to
function input, in 1-second units.
3000.0
Enabled when a timer function is
set in H1- and H2-.
0.0 s
No
A
1A3H
6-82
Timer function
OFF-delay time
Sets the timer function output OFFdelay time (dead band) for the timer
0.0 to
function input, in 1-second units.
3000.0
Enabled when a timer function is
set in H1- and H2-
0.0 s
No
A
1A4H
6-82
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
PI control mode
b5-01
selection
0, 1, 3
0
No
A
1A5H
6-84
b5-02
0.00
to
25.00
1.00
Yes
A
1A6H
6-84
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s
Yes
A
1A7H
6-84
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
1A8H
6-84
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
1AAH
6-84
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
1ABH
6-84
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
1ACH
6-84
0 or 1
0
No
A
1ADH
6-84
Sets output gain.
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No
A
1AEH
6-84
0: Limit to 0 when PI output is
negative.
1: Reverses when PI output is
negative.
Limit to 0 is also active when
reverse prohibit is selected by
b1-04.
0 or 1
0
No
A
1AFH
6-84
b4-01
b4-02
Name
Description
PI Control: b5
Constant
Number
b5-03
b5-04
b5-06
b5-07
b5-08
b5-09
Name
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3: PI control enabled (frequency
reference + PI output)
Sets P-control proportional gain.
Proportional gain
P-control is not performed when the
(P)
setting is 0.00.
Sets I-control integral time in 1-second units.
Integral (I) time
I-control is not performed when the
setting is 0.0.
Sets the I-control limit as a percentIntegral (I) limit age of the maximum output frequency.
Sets the limit after PI-control as a
PI limit
percentage of the maximum output
frequency.
Sets the offset after PI-control as a
PI offset adjustpercentage of the maximum output
ment
frequency.
Sets the time constant for low pass
PI delay time con- filter for PI-control outputs in 1stant
second units.
Usually not necessary to set.
Selects forward/reverse direction
PI output charac- for PI output.
teristics selection 0: PI output is forward.
1: PI output is reverse
b5-10 PI output gain
b5-11
Description
PI reverse output
selection
Change
MEMOduring Access
BUS
Page
Opera- Level
Register
tion
5-15
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Constant
Number
b5-12
b5-13
b5-14
b5-15
b5-16
b5-17
b5-18
b5-19
b5-20
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0: No detection of PI feedback
loss.
1: Detection of PI feedback loss.
Operation continues during
Selection of PI
detection, the fault contact is not
feedback signal
0 to 2
0
operated.
loss detection
2: Detection of PI feedback loss.
The motor coasts to stop at
detection, and the fault contact
operates.
Sets the PI feedback loss detection
PI feedback loss
level as percentage using the maxi- 0 to 100 0%
detection level
mum output frequency as 100%.
PI feedback loss Sets the PI feedback loss detection 0.0 to
1.0 s
detection time
time.
25.5
Sleep function
Sets the sleep function start level as 0.0 to
0.0 Hz
operation level
a frequency.
200.0
Sleep operation
Sets the delay time until the sleep
0.0 to
0.0 s
delay time
function starts.
25.5
Accel/decel time Sets the accel/decel time for the PI 0.0 to
0.0 s
for PI reference
Softstarter (SFS).
25.5
PI Setpoint Selec- 0: Disabled
0 to 1
0
tion
1: Enabled
0.00 to
PI Setpoint
PI-target value
100.00
0
%
Sets the unit for b5-19, U1-38 and
U1-24
0: 0.01 Hz
1: 0.01% (the maximum output
frequency E1-04 is taken as
100%.
2 – 39: rpm, set value is equal to
PI Setpoint Scal0 to
motor poles
0
ing
39999
40 – 39999: User desired display
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
No
A
1B0H
6-111
No
A
1B1H
6-84
No
A
1B2H
6-84
No
A
1B3H
6-84
No
A
1B4H
6-84
No
A
1B5H
6-84
No
A
1DCH
6-84
Yes
A
1DDH
6-84
No
A
1E2H
6-84
0
No
A
1E3H
6-85
0
Yes
A
1E4H
6-85
0s
No
A
1E5H
6-85
0
No
A
1E6H
6-85
Sets the display value
for 100 %.
Sets the number of
decimal digits.
b5-21
Sleep Function
Selection
b5-22 Snooze Level
b5-23
Snooze Delay
Time
b5-24 Wake-Up Level
Sets the operation method of the PI
sleep function
0: Output frequency before Soft0 to 2
starter (SFS)
1: Frequency reference/PI target
2: Snooze
Sets the frequency level at which
the snooze operation starts as per0 to
centage of the max. output fre100%
quency.
Sets a delay timer for the snooze
0 to
function
3600 s
Sets the feedback level at which the
0 to 100
inverter wakes up from snooze
%
operation.
5-16
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
b5-25
b5-26
b5-27
b5-28
b5-29
b5-30
Name
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 to
100%
0
No
A
1E7H
6-85
0 to
3600 s
0s
No
A
1E8H
6-85
0 to
100%
60%
No
A
1E9H
6-85
0 or 1
0
No
A
1EAH
6-85
0 to
2.00
1.00
No
A
1EBH
6-85
0 or 1
0
No
A
1ECH
6-85
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Select whether to enable or disable
energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
0
No
A
1CCH
6-93
Sets the energy-saving coefficient.
0.0 to
Adjust the value in 5% steps until
655.00
the output power becomes minimal.
*1
No
A
1CFH
6-93
0 to
2000
20 ms
No
A
1D0H
6-93
Sets the limit value of the voltage
control range during search operation.
0 to 100
Set to 0 to disable the search operation. 100% is the motor rated voltage.
0%
No
A
1D1H
6-93
Description
Sets the PI setpoint boost when the
snooze mode is activated. If it is
Setpoint Boost
reached once the output will be
switched off. The value is set as
percentage of the PI setpoint.
Maximum Boost Sets the maximum time the boost
Time
operation is performed.
PI Snooze function will only be
activated when the feedback value
Snooze feedback is above this parameter setting.
The value is set as percentage of the
PI setpoint.
Enables or disables the square root
PI Feedback
operation for the PI feedback value.
Square Root
0: Disabled
Operation
1: Enabled
PI Feedback
Sets the gain for the feedback when
Square Root Gain square root operation is enabled.
Selects whether the PI output monitor is shown as square root value or
PI Output Monitor
not.
Square Root
0: Disable
1: Enable
Energy Saving: b8
Constant
Number
Name
Energy-saving
b8-01
mode selection
b8-04
Energy-saving
coefficient
Power detection
b8-05 filter time constant
b8-06
Search operation
voltage limiter
Sets the time constant for output
power detection.
Change
MEMOduring Access
BUS
Page
Opera- Level
Register
tion
* 1. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
5-17
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Tuning Constants: C
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Constant
Number
Name
C1-01
Acceleration
time 1
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 Hz to the
maximum output frequency.
Yes
Q
200H
4-5
6-16
C1-02
Deceleration
time 1
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0 Hz.
Yes
Q
201H
4-5
6-16
C1-03
Acceleration
time 2
Sets the acceleration time when the 0.0 to
multi-function input “accel/decel
6000.0
time 1” is set to ON.
Yes
A
202H
6-16
C1-04
Deceleration
time 2
Sets the deceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 1” is set to ON.
Yes
A
203H
6-16
C1-09
Emergency stop
time
Sets the deceleration time when the
multi-function input “Emergency
(fast) stop” is set to ON.
No
A
208H
6-15
No
A
20AH
6-17
Accel/decel time
C1-11 switching frequency
Setting
Range
Description
Sets the frequency for automatic
acceleration/deceleration switching.
If the output frequency is below the
set frequency: Accel/decel time 2
If the output freuquency is above
0.0 to
the set frequency: Accel/decel
200.0
time 1
The multi-function input “accel/
decel time 1” or “accel/decel time
2” has priority.
Factory
Setting
10.0 s
0.0 Hz
S-Curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Constant
Number
Name
Setting
Range
Description
S-curve character- When the S-curve characteristic time is
C2-01 istic time at accel- set, the accel time will increase by only
half of the S-curve characteristic times
eration start
at start and end.
Run command
Output frequency
S-curve characterC2-02 istic time at acceleration end
ON
C2-02
0.20 s
No
A
20BH
6-17
0.20 s
No
A
20CH
6-17
0.00 to
2.50
Time
+ C1-01 +
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
OFF
C2-01
Taccel = C2-01
2
Factory
Setting
C2-02
2
The S-Curve characteristic time at start
and end of deceleration is fixed to 0.2
sec and can not be changed.
5-18
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Torque Compensation: C4
Constant
Number
C4-01
Name
Torque compensation gain
Torque compenC4-02 sation delay time
constant
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the torque compensation gain.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust under the following circumstances:
• When the cable is long increase
the set value.
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter capacity 0.00 to
(Max. applicable motor capac2.50
ity), increase the set values.
• When the motor is oscillating,
decrease the set values.
Adjust the torque compensation
gain so that at minimum speed the
output current does not exceed the
Inverter rated output current.
1.00
Yes
A
215H
4-11
6-28
The torque compensation delay
time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust under the following circumstances:
• When the motor is oscillating,
increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness of the
motor is low, decrease the set
values.
200 ms
No
A
216H
4-11
6-28
Description
0 to
10000
5-19
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Carrier Frequency: C6
Constant
Number
C6-02
C6-03
Name
Description
Selects the carrier frequency.
Carrier frequency
Select F to enable detailed settings
selection
using constants C6-03 to C6-05.
Carrier frequency
Sets the carrier frequency upper limit
upper limit
and lower limit in kHz units.
The carrier frequency gain is set as follows:
Setting
Range
0 to F
Factory
Setting
6
*1
2.0 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*2 *3
*1
0.4 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*2 *3
*1
00 to
99
00
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
No
Q
224H
4-5
4-11
6-2
No
A
225H
6-2
No
A
226H
6-2
No
A
227H
6-2
Carrier frequency
C6-04
Carrier frequency
lower limit
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
Output
frequency
(Max. output frequency)
K is a coefficient that depends on the setting
of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
Carrier frequency 10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
C6-05
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
proportional gain
*3
* 1. The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 2. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
* 3. This constant can be monitored or set only when C6-02 is set to F.
5-20
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Reference Constants: d
Preset Reference: d1
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Constant
Number
Name
d1-01
Frequency reference 1
Sets the frequency reference.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
280H
6-7
d1-02
Frequency reference 2
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed command 1 is ON
for a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
281H
6-7
d1-03
Frequency reference 3
Yes
Q
282H
6-7
d1-04
Frequency reference 4
Yes
Q
283H
6-7
Yes
Q
292H
6-7
6-61
Jog frequency
d1-17
reference
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed command 2 is ON
0 to 0.00 Hz
for a multi-function input.
FMAX
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed commands 1 and 2
0.00 Hz
are ON for multi-function inputs.
Sets the frequency reference when
the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG
command is ON.
6.00 Hz
Note: The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz).
Reference Limits: d2
Constant
Number
Name
d2-01
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Frequency reference upper limit
Sets the frequency reference upper
limit as a percentage of the max.
output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
No
A
289H
6-25
6-55
d2-02
Frequency reference lower limit
Sets the frequency reference lower
limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
28AH
6-25
6-55
d2-03
Sets the master speed reference
Master speed reflower limit as a percentage of the
erence lower limit
max. output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
293H
6-25
6-55
Note: The PI Sleep Function is also available and can be used without enabled PI controller. It can be used to let the
inverter switch off its output automatically when a minimum output frequency (set in b5-15) has been output for a
time longer than b5-16. Refer also to page 6-90.
5-21
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Jump Frequencies: d3
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Set the center values of the jump
d3-01 Jump frequency 1 frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled when the
jump frequency is set to 0 Hz.
Always ensure that the following
d3-02 Jump frequency 2 applies:
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency
range is prohibited but during
d3-03 Jump frequency 3 acceleration and deceleration, the
speed changes smoothly without
jumping
0.0 to
200.0
Sets the jump frequency bandwidth
in Hz.
The jump frequency range will be
the jump frequency ± d3-04.
Jump frequency
d3-04
width
Factory
Setting
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
0.0 Hz
No
A
294H
6-24
0.0 Hz
No
A
295H
6-24
0.0 Hz
No
A
296H
6-24
0.0 to
20.0
1.0 Hz
No
A
297H
6-24
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Reference Frequency Hold: d4
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Change
MEMOduring Access
BUS
Page
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Sets whether or not frequency reference value on hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is turned
on again the frequency reference
is set to 0.)
Frequency refer1: Enabled (when operation is
d4-01 ence hold function
0 or 1
stopped or the power is turned
selection
on again the inverter starts at the
previous hold frequency.)
This function is available when the
multi-function inputs “Accel/Decel
Ramp Hold” or “Up/Down” commands are set.
0
No
A
298H
6-53
Sets the frequency to be added to or
subtracted from the analog frequency reference as a percentage of
the max. output frequency.
0 to 100
Enabled when the increase (+)
speed command or decrease (–)
speed command is set for a multifunction input.
10%
No
A
299H
6-58
d4-02 + – Speed limits
5-22
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Motor Constants: E
V/f Pattern: E1
Constant
Number
E1-01
E1-03
Name
Factory
Setting
Sets the Inverter input voltage.
155 to
Input voltage set200 V
This setting is used as a reference value 255
*1
ting
*1
for protection functions.
V/f pattern selection
Max. output
E1-04 frequency
(FMAX)
E1-05
Description
Setting
Range
Base frequency
(FA)
E1-07
Mid. output
frequency (FB)
6-95
Q
302H
6-95
0.0 to
200.0
50.0
Hz
No
Q
303H
6-95
0.0 to
255.0
200.0
V
No
Q
304H
6-95
*1
*1
0.0 to
200.0
50.0
Hz
No
Q
305H
6-95
0.0 to
2.5 Hz
200.0
No
A
306H
6-95
No
A
307H
6-95
No
Q
308H
6-95
No
A
309H
No
A
30AH
6-95
No
A
30BH
6-95
No
A
30CH
6-95
Output Voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Mid. output
frequency 2
2
Base voltage
(VBASE)
300H
No
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range. Normally, this setting is not
Mid. output
E1-12 frequency voltage required.
E1-13
Q
F
To set V/f characteristics in a straight
Mid. output
0.0 to 15.0 V
E1-08 frequency voltage line, set the same values for E1-07 and
*1
*1
255
E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1(VB)
08 will be disregarded.
Min. output
Always ensure that the four frequencies 0.0 to 1.2 Hz
E1-09
frequency (FMIN) are set in the following manner:
200.0
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 0.0 to
Min. output
9.0 V
E1-10 frequency voltage (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
255.0
*1
*1
(VMIN)
E1-11
No
0 to D: Select from the 14 preset
patterns.
F:
Custom user-set pattern
0 to F
(Applicable for setting of E1-04
to E1-10.)
Max. output
voltage (VMAX)
E1-06
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
0.0 to 0.0 Hz
*2
200.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
Sets the output voltage of the base frequency (E1-06).
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
*2
0.0 V
*5
4-11
6-95
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
* 3. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
5-23
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Motor Setup: E2
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become the refMotor rated cur- erence value for motor protection
E2-01
rent
and torque limits.
This constant is an input data for
autotuning.
Sets the motor no-load current.
Motor no-load
This constant is automatically set
E2-03
current
during autotuning.
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resisMotor line-to-line tance in Ω units.
E2-05
resistance
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.32 to
6.40
1.90 A
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
No
Q
30EH
6-33
6-94
1, 2*2
No
A
310H
–
0.000
9.842 Ω
to
*2
65.000
No
A
312H
6-94
*1
0.00 to
1.89*3
*2
* 1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. The setting range depends on the inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
5-24
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Option Constants: F
Communications Option Cards: F6
Constant
Number
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using the
Operation selecdeceleration time in C1-02
F6-01 tion after commu1: Coast to stop
nications error
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
1
No
A
3A2H
–
Input level of
external error
0: Always detect
F6-02
from Communica- 1: Detect during operation
tions Option Card
0 or 1
0
No
A
3A3H
–
0: Deceleration to stop using the
Stopping method
deceleration time in C1-02
for external error 1: Coast to stop
F6-03
from Communica- 2: Emergency stop using the
tions Option Card
deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
1
No
A
3A4H
–
Sets the unit of current monitor
0: Ampere
1: 100%/8192
0 or 1
1
No
A
3A6H
–
F6-05
Name
Current monitor
unit selection
Description
5-25
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Terminal Function Constants: H
Multi-function Contact Inputs: H1
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
H1-01
Terminal S3 func- Multi-function contact
tion selection
input 1
0 to 6F
24
No
A
400H
–
H1-02
Terminal S4 func- Multi-function contact
tion selection
input 2
0 to 6F
14
No
A
401H
–
H1-03
Terminal S5 func- Multi-function contact
tion selection
input 3
0 to 6F
3 (0)*
No
A
402H
–
H1-04
Terminal S6 func- Multi-function contact
tion selection
input 4
0 to 6F
4 (3)*
No
A
403H
–
H1-05
Terminal S7 func- Multi-function contact
tion selection
input 5
0 to 6F
6 (4)*
No
A
404H
–
* The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions
Setting
Value
Function
Page
0
3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command)
6-10
1
Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Constant b1-01/b1-02 setting)
6-51
2
Operation Source Option Card/Inverter selection (ON: Option Card)
6-60
3
Multi-step speed reference 1
When H3-09 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed switch.
6-7
4
Multi-step speed reference 2
6-7
6
Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
6-7
6-51
7
Accel/decel time 1
6-16
8
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
6-52
6-43
9
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
6-52
6-43
A
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, frequency is hold)
6-53
C
Multi-function analog input A2 disable/enable (ON: Enable)
6-52
F
Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)
–
10
Up command (Always set with the Down command)
6-55
11
Down command (Always set with the Up command)
6-55
12
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
6-61
13
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
6-61
14
Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
7-2
15
Emergency stop. (NO: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when ON.)
6-15
17
Emergency stop (NC: Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1-09 when OFF)
6-15
18
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function outputs are set in
H2-.)
6-82
5-26
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Setting
Value
Function
Page
19
PI control disable (ON: PI control disabled)
6-86
1B
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants are write protected.)
6-109
1C
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency reference.)
6-58
1D
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency reference.)
6-58
1E
Analog frequency reference sample/hold
6-59
External fault
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
6-62
30
PI control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PI control)
6-86
31
PI control integral hold (ON: Hold)
6-86
34
PI soft starter disable (ON: disabled)
6-86
35
PI input characteristics switch
6-86
36
Operation Source Option/Inverter selection 2 (ON: inverter settings)
6-60
60
Motor preheat command (ON: Performs motor preheat)
6-14
61
External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)
6-40
62
External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)
6-40
64
External speed search command 3
6-39
65
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NC contact)
–
66
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
–
67
Communications test mode
6-81
68
High-slip braking (HSB)
6-101
69
Jog Frequency 2
6-8
6A
Drive enable (NC, ON: Drive enabled, OFF: Drive disabled
6-53
6B
Operation Source Communication/Inverter selection (ON: RS-422/485 port)
6-60
6C
Operation Source Communication/Inverter selection 2 (ON: inverter settings)
6-60
6D
AUTO mode selection (ON: AUTO mode active)
6-61
6E
HAND mode selection (ON: HAND mode active)
6-61
6F
Maintenance Mode
–
70
Bypass Drive Enable
6-53
20 to 2F
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
H2-01
Terminal M1-M2 Multi-function contact
function selection output 1
0 to 38
0
No
A
40BH
–
H2-02
Terminal M3-M4 Multi-function contact
function selection output 2
0 to 38
1
No
A
40CH
–
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
Setting
Value
0
1
Function
Page
During run (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)
6-63
Zero-speed
6-64
5-27
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setting
Value
Function
Page
2
fref/fout agree 1 (detection width L4-02 is used.)
6-27
3
fref/fset agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used and during
frequency agree)
6-27
4
Frequency detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, with detection width L4-02
used)
6-27
5
Frequency detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-01, with
detection width L4-02 used)
6-27
6
Inverter operation ready
READY: After initialization or no faults
6-64
7
During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection
6-64
8
During baseblock (NO contact, ON: during baseblock)
6-64
9
Frequency reference source selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
6-64
A
Run command source selection status (ON: Run command from Operator)
6-64
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact, ON: Overtorque/undertorque detection)
6-31
C
Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05)
6-44
E
Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and CPF01 has
occurred.)
6-64
F
Not used. (Set when the terminal is not used.)
10
Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
6-64
11
Fault reset command active
6-65
12
Timer function output
6-82
17
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact, OFF: Torque detection)
6-31
1A
Reverse direction
6-65
1E
Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
6-45
1F
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
6-33
20
OH pre-alarm (temperature reached L8-02)
6-65
38
Drive enabled
6-65
39
Drive waiting (start delay time b1-11 is active)
6-65
3A
During OH and reduced Frequency
6-65
3B
RUN command from option card/communications
6-65
-
Analog Inputs: H3
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
MEMOduring Access
BUS
Page
Opera- Level
Register
tion
H3-02
Gain (terminal
A1)
Sets the frequency as a percentage
0.0 to
of themaximum output fre100.0%
1000.0
quency, when 10 V is input.
Yes
A
411H
6-22
H3-03
Bias (terminal
A1)
Sets the frequency as a percentage -100.0
of the maximum frequency, when
to
0 V is inut.
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
412H
6-22
2
No
A
417H
6-22
Multi-function
analog input terH3-08
minal A2 signal
level selection
0: 0 to +10V (11 bit).
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
3: 0 to 20 mA (9-bit input)
Switch current and voltage input
using the switch S1 on the control
terminal board.
0, 2, 3
5-28
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Multi-function
analog input terH3-09
minal A2 function selection
Selects the multi-function analog
input function for terminal A2.
Refer to the table on the next
page.
0 to 16
0
Gain (terminal
H3-10
A2)
Name
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
No
A
418H
6-22
Sets the input level when terminal
A2 input is 10 V (20 mA) accord- 0.0 to
100.0%
ing to the 100% value of the func- 1000.0
tion set in constant H3-09.
Yes
A
419H
6-22
Sets the input level when terminal
-100.0
A2 is 0 V (4 mA/0 mA) according
to
to the 100% value of the function
+100.0
set in constant H3-09.
0.0%
Yes
A
41AH
6-22
Sets primary delay filter time conAnalog input filter stant for the two analog input ter- 0.00 to
H3-12
time constant
minals (A1 and A2).
2.00
Effective for noise supression etc.
0.00
s
No
A
41BH
6-22
0
No
A
41CH
–
H3-11
H3-13
Bias (terminal
A2)
Terminal A1/A2
switching
0: Use terminal A1 analog input
as main frequency reference.
1: Use terminal A2 analog input
as main frequency reference.
Effective when H3-09 is set to 2.
0 or 1
H3-09 Settings
Setting
Value
0
Function
Frequency bias
Contents (100%)
Page
Maximum output frequency
6-22
2
Auxiliary frequency reference (is used as
Maximum output frequency
frequency reference 2)
6-5
B
PI feedback
Maximum output frequency
–
D
Frequency Bias 2
Maximum output frequency
6-22
E
Motor temperature input
–
6-36
16
PI differential mode
Maximum output frequency
–
1F
Analog input not used.
–
–
5-29
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
Constant
Number
H4-01
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Sets the number of the monitor item
Monitor selection
to be output (U1-) at terminal
1 to 53
(terminal FM)
FM.
Factory
Setting
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
2
No
A
41DH
6-66
Gain (terminal
FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM) gain.
Sets the percentage of the monitor
item that is equal to 10V output at
terminal FM. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10V.
0 to
1000.0
%
100%
Yes
Q
41EH
6-66
H4-03
Bias (terminal
FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM) bias.
Sets the percentage of the monitor
item that is equal to 0V output at
terminal FM.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
-110 to
+110%
0.0%
Yes
A
41FH
6-66
H4-04
Sets the number of the monitor item
Monitor selection
to be output (U1-) at terminal
1 to 53
(terminal AM)
AM.
8
No
A
420H
6-66
H4-02
Gain (terminal
AM)
Set the multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM) gain.
Sets the percentage of the monitor
item that is equal to 10V output at
terminal AM. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10V.
0 to
1000.0
%
50.0%
Yes
Q
421H
6-66
Bias (terminal
H4-06
AM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM) bias.
Sets the percentage of the monitor
item that is equal to 0V output at
terminal AM.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V.
-110.0
to
+110.0
%
0.0%
Yes
A
422H
6-66
Sets the signal output level for
Analog output 1 multi-function output 1 (terminal
H4-07 signal level selec- FM)
tion
0: 0 to +10 V output
2: 4 – 20 mA*
0 or 2
0
No
A
423H
6-66
Sets the signal output level for
Analog output 2 multi-function output 2 (terminal
H4-08 signal level selec- AM)
tion
0: 0 to +10 V output
2: 4 – 20 mA*
0 or 2
0
No
A
424H
6-66
H4-05
* An analog output signal of 4 - 20 mA requiers an optional terminal board for current output.
5-30
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
Constant
Number
Name
H5-01 Station address
Description
Sets the Inverter's node address.
Setting
Range
0 to 20
*
Factory
Setting
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
1F
No
A
425H
6-70
Communications
speed selection
Sets the baud rate for MEMOBUS
communications.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
0 to 4
3
No
A
426H
6-70
Communications
parity selection
Sets the parity for MEMOBUS
communications.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0 to 2
0
No
A
427H
6-70
Sets the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using the
deceleration time in C1-02
Stopping method
1: Coast to stop
H5-04 after communica2: Emergency stop using the
tions error
deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
4: Continue operation with the frequency reference set in d1-04
0 to 4
3
No
A
428H
6-70
Communications
H5-05 error detection
selection
Sets whether or not a communications timeout is to be detected as a
communications error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
0 or 1
1
No
A
429H
6-70
H5-06 Send wait time
Sets the time from the Inverter
receiving data to when the Inverter
starts to send.
5 to 65
5 ms
No
A
42AH
6-70
RTS control ON/
H5-07
OFF
Enables or disables RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only
when sending)
0 or 1
1
No
A
42BH
6-70
Communications
Selection
Selects the Protocol for the Communication
0: Memobus
1: N2 protocol
2: PI protocol
0 to 2
0
No
A
434H
6-70
No
A
435H
H5-02
H5-03
H5-08
Sets the time before CE error
(Communication error) is detected 0.0 to
H5-09 CE detection time
2.0 sec
when MEMOBUS communication 10.0 sec
is used.
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
5-31
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Protection Function Constants: L
Motor Overload: L1
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Motor protection
selection
Sets whether the motor overload
function is enabled or disabled at
electric thermal overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor
protection (fan cooled motor)
When several motors are connected to one Inverter, set to 0 and
ensure that each motor is installed
with a protection device.
0 or 1
1
No
Q
480H
6-33
Motor protection
time constant
Sets the electric thermal detection
time in seconds units.
Usually changing this setting is not
necessary.
The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload capability is known, also set the overload
resistance protection time for when
the motor is hot started.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0 min
No
A
481H
6-33
Selects the operation when the
input motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the alarm
detection level (1.17 V) (H3-09
Alarm operation must be set to E).
L1-03 selection during
0: Decelerate to stop
motor overheating 1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (oH3 on the
Operator flashes).
0 to 3
3
No
A
482H
6-35
0 to 2
1
No
A
483H
6-35
0.20 s
No
A
484H
6-35
L1-01
L1-02
Motor overheatL1-04 ing operation
selection
Selects the operation when the
motor temperature (thermistor)
input exceeds the overheating
detection level (2.34 V) (H3-09
must be set to E).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
Motor temperaL1-05 ture input filter
time constant
Sets H3-09 to E and sets the delay
0.00 to
time constant for the motor temper10.00
ature (thermistor) input in seconds.
Factory
Setting
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Setting
Range
5-32
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2
Constant
Number
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0: Disabled (DC bus undervoltage
(UV1) detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the
power returns within the time set
in L2-02. When L2-02 is
Momentary power
exceeded, DC bus undervoltage
L2-01
loss detection
is detected.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operating.
(Restarts when power returns
during control operations. Does
not detect DC bus
undervoltage.)
0 to 2
0
L2-02
Ridethrough time, when MomenMomentary power
tary Power Loss Selection (L2-01)
loss ridethru time
is set to 1, in units of seconds.
0 to 2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock
time
Sets the Inverter's minimum baseblock time, when the Inverter is
restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Set the time to approximately 0.7
times the motor time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a speed
search or DC injection braking,
increase the set values.
0.1 to
5.0
0.1 s
Voltage recovery
L2-04
time
Sets the time required to return the
Inverter output voltage from 0V to
normal voltage at the completion of
a speed search.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
L2-05
Name
Undervoltage
detection level
Description
Sets the main circuit undervoltage
(UV) detection level (main circuit
DC voltage).
Usually changing this setting is not
necessary.
150 to
210
*2
0.1 s
*1
*1
*1
190 V
*2
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
No
A
485H
6-38
No
A
486H
6-38
No
A
487H
6-38
6-39
No
A
488H
6-38
6-39
No
A
489H
6-38
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Value for a 400 V class Inverter is double.
5-33
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Stall Prevention: L3
Constant
Number
Name
Stall prevention
L3-01 selection during
accel
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0: Disabled (Acceleration as set.
With a heavy load, the motor
may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stopped
when L3-02 level is exceeded.
Acceleration starts again when
the current has fallen below the
stall prevention level).
2: Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a
basis, acceleration is
automatically adjusted. Set
acceleration time is
disregarded.)
0 to 2
1
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 or
2.
Set as a percentage of Inverter rated
Stall prevention
L3-02
current.
0 to 200 120%
level during accel
Usually changing this setting is not
necessary. Reduce the setting when
the motor stalls.
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
No
A
48FH
6-18
No
A
490H
6-18
Stall prevention
L3-04 selection during
decel
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If
deceleration time is too short, a
DC-Bus overvoltage may
result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the DC-Bus
voltage exceeds the stall prevention level. Deceleration restarts
when the voltage falls below the
stall prevention level again.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
(Deceleration rate is
automatically adjusted so that in
Inverter can decelerate in the
shortest possible time. The set
deceleration time is
disregarded.)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor Unit, Braking Unit) is
used, always set to 0.
0 to 2
1
No
Q
492H
6-20
Stall prevention
L3-05 selection during
running
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With a
heavy load, the motor may stall.)
1: Deceleration using deceleration
0 to 2
time 1 (C1-02.)
2: Deceleration using decelerationtime 2 (C1-04.)
1
No
A
493H
6-30
Stall prevention
L3-06 level during running
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Set as a percentage of the Inverter
rated current.
Usually changing this setting is not
necessary.
Reduce the setting when the motor
stalls.
120%
No
A
494H
6-30
30 to
200
5-34
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Reference Detection: L4
Constant
Number
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Speed agreement
L4-01
detection level
Effective when "fout/fset agree 1",
"Frequency detection 1" or "Frequency detection 2" is set for a
multi-function output.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
499H
6-26
Speed agreement
detection width
Effective when "fref/fout agree 1",
"fout/fset agree 1" or "Frequency
detection 1" or "Frequency detection 2" is set for a multi-function
output.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
No
A
49AH
6-26
Operation when
L4-05 frequency reference is missing
0: Stop (Operation follows the
frequency reference.)
1: Operation continues at the frequency, set in parameter L4-06.
Frequency reference loss means
that the frequency reference value
drops over 90% in 400 ms.
0 or 1
1
No
A
49DH
6-44
Frequency referSets the frequency reference value
ence value at freL4-06
when the frequency reference is
quency reference
missing
loss
0.0 to
100.0%
80%
No
A
4C2H
6-44
Factory
Setting
L4-02
Name
Fault Restart: L5
Constant
Number
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Number of auto
restart attempts
Sets the number of auto restart
attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault
and conducts a speed search from
the run frequency.
0 to 10
0
No
A
49EH
6-46
Sets whether a fault contact output
is activated during fault restart.
Auto restart oper- 0: No output (Fault contact is not
L5-02
activated.)
ation selection
1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
49FH
6-46
Sets the maximum time, the restart
is tried.
0.5 to
180.0
10.0s
No
A
4A0H
6-46
L5-01
L5-03 Fault Retry time
5-35
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Torque Detection: L6
Constant
Number
Factory
Setting
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Name
Description
Setting
Range
L6-01
Torque detection
selection
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only with
speed agreement; operation
continues (warning is output).
2: Overtorque detected
continuously during operation;
operation continues (warning is
output).
3: Overtorque detection only with
speed agreement; output stopped
upon detection.
4: Overtorque detected
continuously during operation;
output stopped upon detection.
5: Undertorque detection only with
speed agreement; operation
continues (warning is output).
6: Undertorque detected
continuously during operation;
operation continues (warning is
output).
7: Undertorque detection only with
speed agreement; output stopped
upon detection.
8: Undertorque detected
continuously during operation;
output stopped upon detection.
0 to 8
6
No
A
4A1H
6-31
L6-02
Torque detection
level
Inverter rated current is set as
100%.
0 to 300
15%
No
A
4A2H
6-31
L6-03
Torque detection
time
Sets the overtorque/undertorque
detection time.
0.0 to
10.0
10.0 s
No
A
4A3H
6-31
5-36
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Hardware Protection: L8
Constant
Number
L8-02
Name
Overheat prealarm level
Operation selecL8-03 tion after overheat pre-alarm
L8-06
Input Phase Loss
Detection Level
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the detection temperature for
the Inverter overheat detection prealarm in °C.
The pre-alarm detects when the
cooling fin temperature reaches the
set value.
50 to
130
95 °C*
No
A
4AEH
6-47
Sets the operation for when the
Inverter overheat pre-alarm occurs.
0: Decelerate to stop using the
deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
C1-09.
3: Continue operation (Monitor
display only.)
4: OH-Alarm and output frequency
reduction (L8-19)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to
2 and a alarm will be given in setting 3 and 4.
0 to 4
4
No
A
4AFH
6-47
Allowed DC bus ripple before Input 0.0 to
Phase Loss is detected.
25.0 %
5%
No
A
4B2H
6-47
0: Disabled
Ground fault pro- 1: Enabled
L8-09
tection selection It is not recommended to use
another setting than factory setting.
0 or 1
1
No
A
4B5H
6-47
Sets the ON/OFF control for the
cooling fan.
Cooling Fan con- 0: ON only when RUN command is
L8-10
trol selection
on
1: ON whenever inverter is powered up
0 or 1
0
No
A
4B6H
6-48
0 to 300
300 s
No
A
4B7H
6-48
45 to 60 45 °C
No
A
4B8H
6-49
OL2 characterisL8-15 tics selection at
low speeds
0: OL2 characteristics at low
speeds disabled.
1: OL2 characteristics at low
speeds enabled.
It is not recommended to use
another setting than factory setting.
0 or 1
1
No
A
4BBH
6-49
Soft CLA selecL8-18
tion
0: Disable (gain = 0)
1: Enable
It is not recommended to use
another setting than factory setting.
0 or 1
1
No
A
4BEH
6-50
Frequency referL8-19 ence during OH
pre-alarm
Sets the frequency reference when
OH pre-alarm is detected in percent
of maximum frequency (E1-04)
0.0 to
100.0
20.0 %
No
A
4BFH
6-48
Cooling fan conL8-11
trol delay time
L8-12
Set the time in seconds to delay
turning OFF the cooling fan after
the inverter STOP command is
given.
Ambient temperaSet the ambient temperature.
ture
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
5-37
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
N: Special Adjustments
Hunting Prevention Function: N1
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Hunting-prevenN1-01 tion function
selection
0: Hunting-prevention function
disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function
enabled
0 or 1
1
No
A
580H
6-29
Hunting-prevention gain
Sets the hunting-prevention gain
multiplication factor.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
No
A
581H
4-11
6-29
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
1 to 20
5%
No
A
588H
Sets the current limit for deceleration during high-slip braking in perHigh-slip braking cent, taking the motor rated current 100 to
N3-02
200
current limit
as 100%. The resulting limit must
be 120% of the Inverter rated current or less.
150%
No
A
589H
Sets the dwell time for the output
High-slip braking frequency for FMIN (1.5 Hz).
N3-03
stop dwell time
Effective only during deceleration
with high-slip braking.
0.0 to
10.0
1.0 s
No
A
58AH
Set the OL time when the output
High-slip braking frequency does not change for any
N3-04
OL time
reason during deceleration with
high-slip braking.
30 to
1200
40 s
No
A
58BH
N1-02
High-slip Braking: N3
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Sets the frequency width for decelHigh-slip braking
eration during high-slip braking in
N3-01 deceleration frepercent, taking the maximum frequency width
quency (E1-04) as 100%.
Change
MEMOduring Access
BUS
Page
Opera- Level
Register
tion
5-38
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
6-101
6-101
6-101
6-101
User Constant Tables
Digital Operator Constants: o
Monitor Select: o1
Constant
Number
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
6 to 53
6
Yes
A
500H
6-102
Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on.
Monitor selection 1: Frequency reference
o1-02
1 to 4
after power up
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
1
Yes
A
501H
6-102
0 to
39999
0
No
A
502H
6-102
Sets the brightness on the optional
LCD operator (JVOP-160).
0: light
1:
2:
3: normal
4:
5: dark
0 to 5
3
Yes
A
504H
–
Name
Description
Set the number of the 3rd. monitor
item to be displayed in the Drive
o1-01 Monitor selection
Mode (U1-).
(Not on LCD operator.)
Frequency units
o1-03 of reference setting and monitor
Sets the units that will be set and
displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39: rpm units (Set the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999: User desired display
Set the desired values for setting
and display for the max. output
frequency.
Sets the value that is
to be displayed at
100% excluding the
decimal point.
Sets the number of
decimal places.
Example: When the max. output
frequency value is 200.0, set 12000
o1-05 LCD-Focus
o1-06
Monitor Mode
Selection*1
0: Below the active monitor parameter the next 2 sequential monitors are diaplayed.
1: Below the active monitor the 2
monitors specified by o1-07 and
o1-08 are locked
0 or 1
0
No
A
517H
–
o1-07
2nd Monitor
Selection*1
Selects the monitor that is displayed
and locked in the second line of the 1 to 53
operator display.
2
No
A
518H
–
5-39
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Constant
Number
Name
o1-08
3rd Monitor
Selection*1
Description
Setting
Range
Selects the monitor that is displayed
and locked in the third line of the
1 to 53
operator display.
Factory
Setting
3
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
No
A
519H
–
* 1. Parameter is only effective if HOA operator with LCD (JVOP-162) is used.
Multi-function Selections: o2
Constant
Number
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the Digital Operator Local/
Remote key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between the
Digital Operator and the
constant settings b1-01, b1-02.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
505H
6-102
Sets the Stop key in the run mode.
0: Disabled (When the run
STOP key during
command is issued from an
o2-02 control circuit terexternal terminal, the Stop key is
minal operation
disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even during
run.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
506H
6-102
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set
constants as user initial values.)
User constant inio2-03
2: All clear (Clears all recorded
tial value
user initial values)
When the set constants are recorded
as user initial values, 1110 will be
set in A1-03.
0 to 2
0
No
A
507H
6-102
o2-04 kVA selection
Do not set unless using a control
board from an Inverter with a dif0 to FF
ferent capacity. (Refer to page 5-48
for the setting values).
0
No
A
508H
-
Frequency refero2-05 ence setting
method selection
When the frequency reference is set
on the Digital Operator frequency
reference monitor, sets whether the
Enter key is necessary or not.
0: Enter key needed
1: Enter key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts
the frequency reference without
Enter key operation.
0 or 1
0
No
A
509H
6-102
Sets the operation when the Digital
Operator is disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation continues
Operation seleceven if the Digital Operator is
tion when digital
o2-06
disconnected.)
operator is discon1: Enabled (OPR is detected at
nected
Digital Operator disconnection.
Inverter output is switched off,
and fault contact is operated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
50AH
6-102
Name
LOCAL/
o2-01 REMOTE key
enable/disable
5-40
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the cumulative operation time
Cumulative oper- in hour units.
o2-07
ation time setting Operation time is calculated from
the set values.
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
50BH
6-102
Cumulative opero2-08 ation time selection
0: Cumulative time when the
Inverter power is on. (All time
while the Inverter power is on is
accumulated.)
1: Cumulative Inverter run time.
(Only Inverter output time is
accumulated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
50CH
6-102
o2-09 Initialize Mode
2: Europe
5: PV-E Spec.
2 or 5
2
No
A
50DH
6-102
Fan operation
o2-10
time setting
Set the initial value of the fan operation time.
The operation time accumulates
from the set value.
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
50EH
6-102
0: Disable
Fault trace initial- 1: Initialize (= zero clear) after seto2-12
ize
ting ”1“ o2-12 will be returned to
”0“
0 or 1
0
No
A
511H
6-102
0 or 1
0
No
A
512H
6-102
0 or 1
1
No
A
513H
6-102
Name
Energy monitor
o2-14
initialize
Description
Resets the monitor parameters
U1-24 and U1-30 back to zero.
0: No change
1: Reset to zero
If set to 0 the HAND button on the
digital operator is disabled and the
drive will not enter the HAND
HAND Key funco2-15
mode and start to run when the
tion selection
HAND button is pressed.
0: HAND button disabled
1: HAND button enabled
Copy Function: o3
User constants for the copy function are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Copy function
o3-01
selection
o3-02
Read permission
selection
Change
MEMOduring Access
BUS
Page
Opera- Level
Register
tion
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3
0
No
A
515H
6-105
0: READ prohibited
1: READ permitted
0 or 1
0
No
A
516H
6-105
Description
5-41
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
T: Motor Autotuning
Constant
Number
Name
T1-02
T1-04
Description
Setting
Range
Motor output
power
Sets the output power of the motor
in kilowatts.
0.00 to
650.00
Motor rated current
Sets the rated current of the motor
in Amps.
0.32 to
6.40 *2
Factory
Setting
Change
MEMOduring Access
Page
BUS
Opera- Level
Register
tion
0.40
kW
No
A
702H
4-7
No
A
704H
4-7
*1
1.90 A
*1
* 1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 2. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
U: Monitor Constants
Status Monitor Constants: U1
Constant
Number
Name
U1-01
Frequency reference
Output Signal Level DurMEMOMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
BUS
Unit
Output
Register
Monitors/sets the frequency refer- 10 V: Max. frequency
0.01
40H
ence value.*
(0 to + 10 V possible)
Hz
Description
U1-02 Output frequency Monitors the output frequency.*
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to + 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
41H
U1-03 Output current
Monitors the output current.
10 V: Inverter rated output
current
(0 to +10 V, absolute value
output)
0.1 A
42H
U1-06 Output voltage
Monitors the output voltage refer- 10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
ence value.
(0 to +10 V output)
0.1 V
45H
U1-07 DC bus voltage
Monitors the main DC bus voltage.
1V
46H
U1-08 Output power
10 V: Inverter capacity
Monitors the output power (inter- (max. applicable motor
nally detected value).
capacity)
(0 to + 10 V possible)
0.1
kW
47H
10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
(0 to +10 V output)
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
5-42
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level DurMEMOMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
BUS
Unit
Output
Register
Shows input ON/OFF status.
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON
1: REV command
(S2) is ON
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON
U1-10
Input terminal status
1: Multi input 2
(S4) is ON
(Cannot be output.)
–
49H
(Cannot be output.)
–
4AH
(Cannot be output.)
–
4BH
Monitors the total operating time
of the Inverter.
Cumulative operU1-13
The initial value and the operating (Cannot be output.)
ation time
time/power ON time selection can
be set in o2-07 and o2-08.
1
hr
4CH
–
4DH
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON
Shows output ON/OFF status.
1: Multi-function
contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON
U1-11
Output terminal
status
1: Multi-function
contact output 2
(M3-M4) is ON
Not used
(Always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/MB-MC) is
ON
Inverter operating status.
Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
U1-12 Operation status
1: Reset signal
input
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter ready
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
U1-14
Software No.
(flash memory)
U1-15
Monitors the input level of analog
Terminal A1 input
10 V: 100%
input A1. A value of 100% correlevel
(0 to + 10 V possible)
sponds to 10V input.
0.1%
4EH
U1-16
Monitors the input level of analog
10 V/20mA: 100%
Terminal A2 input
input A2. A value of 100% corre(0 to +10 V possible)
level
sponds to 10V/20mA input.
0.1%
4FH
0.1%
51H
Motor secondary
U1-18
current (Iq)
(Manufacturer’s ID number)
Monitors the calculated value of
the motor secondary current.
The motor rated current corresponds to 100%.
(Cannot be output.)
10 V: Motor rated current)
(0 to +10 V output)
5-43
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level DurMEMOMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
BUS
Unit
Output
Register
Monitors the frequency reference
after the soft starter.
Output frequency
This frequency value does not
10 V: Max. frequency
U1-20 after soft-starter
include compensations, such as
(0 to + 10 V possible)
(SFS output)
slip compensation.
The unit is set in o1-03.
U1-24 PI feedback value
U1-28
Software No.
(CPU)
0.01
Hz
53H
Monitors the feedback value when 10 V: 100% feedback value
PI control is used.
(0 to + 10 V possible)
0.01
%
57H
(CPU software No.)
–
5BH
(Cannot be output.)
U1-29 MWh display
Monitors the 5 higher digits MWh
(Cannot be output.)
display.
1
MWh
5CH
U1-30 kWh display
Monitors the 4 lower digits, kWh
(Cananot be output.)
display.
0.1
kWh
5DH
U1-31 LED Test
For testing LEDs on operator. If
this monitor is selected, all LED’s (Cannot be output.)
light up (only on LED operator).
–
3CH
Shows the first constant number
when an OPE fault is detected.
(Cannot be output.)
–
61H
PI input volume
10 V: 100% PI input
(0 to + 10 V possible)
0.01
%
63H
U1-37 PI output volume PI control output
10 V: 100% PI output
(0 to + 10 V possible)
0.01
%
64H
U1-38 PI setpoint
10 V: 100% PI setpoint
0.01
%
65H
(Cannot be output.)
–
66H
Monitors the total operating time
Cooling fan operof the cooling fan. The time can (Cannot be output.)
ating time
be set in 02-10.
1
hr
68H
U1-34
OPE fault constant
U1-36 PI input volume
PI setpoint
Shows MEMOBUS errors.
MEMOBUS
U1-39 communications
error code
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used
(always 0)
1: Parity error
1: Overrun error
1: Framing error
1: Timeout
Not used
(always 0)
U1-40
Frequency referU1-51 ence at AUTO
operation
Monitors the value of the frequency reference when AUTO
operation is active.
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to 10 V possible)
0.01
%
72H
Frequency referU1-52 ence at HAND
operation
Monitors the value of the frequency reference when HAND
operation is active.
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to 10 V possible)
0.01
%
73H
U1-53 PI feedback 2
Monitors the feedback value of
10V: 100% feedback value
the PI fdbk2 input when Differen(0 to + 10V possible)
tial PI is selected (H3-=6B)
0.01
%
74H
5-44
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Fault Trace: U2
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
MEMOBUS
Register
U2-01 Current fault
The content of the current fault.
–
80H
U2-02 Last fault
The error content of the last fault.
–
81H
The reference frequency when the last
fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
82H
U2-04 Output frequency at fault
The output frequency when the last
fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
83H
U2-05 Output current at fault
The output current when the last fault
occurred.
0.1 A
84H
Output voltage reference at The output reference voltage when the
fault
last fault occurred.
0.1 V
86H
1V
87H
U2-03
U2-07
Reference frequency at
fault
U2-08 DC bus voltage at fault
The main current DC voltage when
the last fault occurred.
U2-09 Output power at fault
The output power when the last fault
occurred.
0.1
kW
88H
The input terminal status when the
U2-11 Input terminal status at fault last fault occurred.
The format is the same as for U1-10.
–
8AH
Output terminal status at
fault
The output terminal status when the
last fault occurred. The format is the
same as for U1-11.
–
8BH
U2-13 Operation status at fault
The operating status when the last
fault occurred. The format is the same
as for U1-12.
–
8CH
Cumulative operation time The operating time when the last fault
at fault
occurred.
1
hr
8DH
U2-12
U2-14
(Cannot be output.)
Note The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-45
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Fault History: U3
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Output Signal Level DurMEMOMin.
ing Multi-Function Analog
BUS
Unit
Output
Register
U3-01 Last fault
The error content of 1st last fault.
–
90H
U3-02 Second last fault
The error content of 2nd last fault.
–
91H
U3-03 Third last fault
The error content of 3rd last fault.
–
92H
U3-04 Fourth last fault
The error content of 4th last fault.
–
93H
U3-05
Cumulative operation time The total operating time when the
at fault
1st previous fault occurred.
1
hr
94H
U3-06
Accumulated time of second fault
The total operating time when the
2nd previous fault occurred.
1
hr
95H
U3-07
Accumulated time of third
fault
The total operating time when the
3rd previous fault occurred.
1
hr
96H
U3-08
Accumulated time of
fourth/oldest fault
The total operating time when the (Cannot be output.)
4th previous fault occurred.
1
hr
97H
–
804
805H
806H
807H
808H
809H
1hr
806H
80FH
810H
811H
812H
813H
U3-09
–
Fifth last to tenth last fault
U3-14
U3-15
Accumulated time of fifth
–
to tenth fault
U3-20
The error content of the 5th to
10th last fault
Total generating time when 5th ...
10th pevious fault occured
Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-46
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW
Constant Number
Unit
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
Factory Setting
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
F
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
60.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
E1-07
*
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
E1-08
*
V
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
19.0
24.0
19.0
24.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
E1-10
*
V
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
11.0
13.0
11.0
15.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW
Constant Number
Unit
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
Factory Setting
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
F
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
60.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
E1-07
*
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
E1-08
*
V
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
18.0
23.0
18.0
23.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
E1-10
*
V
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
11.0
9.0
13.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW
Constant Number
Unit
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
Factory Setting
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
F
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
120.0
60.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
E1-07
*
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
E1-08
*
V
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
15.0
20.0
15.0
20.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
E1-10
*
V
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
7.0
11.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
* The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
5-47
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
200 V Class Inverters
Constant
Number
–
o2-04
b8-04
Name
Unit
Factory Setting
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
Energy-saving coefficient
kW
–
0.4
0
0.75
1
1.5
2
2.2
3
3.7
4
5.5
5
7.5
6
11
7
15
8
–
288.20
223.70
169.40
156.80
122.90
94.75
72.69
70.44
63.13
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection*
–
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
E2-01
Motor rated current
A
1.90
3.30
6.20
8.50
14.00
19.60
26.60
39.7
53.0
E2-03
Motor no-load current
A
1.20
1.80
2.80
3.00
4.50
5.10
8.00
11.2
15.2
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
9.842
5.156
1.997
1.601
0.771
0.399
0.288
0.230
0.138
L2-02
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
s
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB)
time
s
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
°C
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
Note: Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10
kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more, the Inverter
rated current will need to be reduced.
Constant
Number
–
o2-04
b8-04
Name
Unit
Factory Setting
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
Energy-saving coefficient
kW
–
18.5
9
22
A
30
B
37
C
45
D
55
E
75
F
90
10
110
11
–
57.87
51.79
46.27
38.16
35.78
31.35
23.10
23.10
23.10
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection*
–
6
6
4
3
3
3
3
3
1
E2-01
Motor rated current
A
65.8
77.2
105.0
131.0
160.0
190.0
260.0
260.0
260.0
E2-03
Motor no-load current
A
15.7
18.5
21.9
38.2
44.0
45.6
72.0
72.0
72.0
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
0.101
0.079
0.064
0.039
0.030
0.022
0.023
0.023
0.023
L2-02
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB)
time
s
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
°C
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
Note: Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10
kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more, the Inverter
rated current will need to be reduced.
5-48
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constant Tables
400 V Class Inverters
Constant
Number
–
o2-04
b8-04
C6-02
E2-01
E2-03
E2-05
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02
Constant
Number
–
o2-04
b8-04
C6-02
E2-01
E2-03
E2-05
L2-02
L2-03
L2-04
L8-02
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kW
kVA selection
–
Energy-saving coeffi–
cient
Carrier frequency selec–
tion *
Motor rated current
A
Motor no-load current
A
Motor line-to-line resisΩ
tance
Momentary power loss
s
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
s
time
Voltage recovery time
s
Overheat pre-alarm level °C
Name
Factory Setting
0.4
20
0.75
21
1.5
22
2.2
23
3.7
24
4.0
25
5.5
26
7.5
27
11
28
15
29
576.40
447.40
338.80
313.60
245.80
236.44
189.50
145.38
140.88
126.26
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
1.00
0.60
1.60
0.80
3.10
1.40
4.20
1.50
7.00
2.30
7.00
2.30
9.80
2.60
13.30
4.00
19.9
5.6
26.5
7.6
38.198
22.459
10.100
6.495
3.333
3.333
1.595
1.152
0.922
0.550
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.8
1.0
2.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
0.3
95
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kW
kVA selection
–
Energy-saving coeffi–
cient
Carrier frequency selec–
tion *
Motor rated current
A
Motor no-load current
A
Motor line-to-line resisΩ
tance
Momentary power loss
s
ridethru time
Min. baseblock (BB)
s
time
Voltage recovery time
s
Overheat pre-alarm level °C
Factory Setting
18.5
2A
22
2B
30
2C
37
2D
45
2E
55
2F
75
30
90
31
110
32
132
33
115.74
103.58
92.54
76.32
71.56
67.20
46.20
41.22
36.23
33.18
6
6
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
32.9
7.8
38.6
9.2
52.3
10.9
65.6
19.1
79.7
22.0
95.0
24.0
130.0
36.0
156.0
40.0
190.0
49.0
223.0
58.0
0.403
0.316
0.269
0.155
0.122
0.088
0.092
0.056
0.046
0.035
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.7
0.6
95
0.6
95
0.6
95
0.6
95
0.6
95
1.0
100
1.0
95
1.0
110
1.0
110
1.0
110
5-49
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Constant
Number
–
o2-04
b8-04
Name
Unit
Factory Setting
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
Energy-saving coefficient
kW
–
160
34
185
35
220
36
300
37
–
30.13
30.57
27.13
21.76
–
2
2
1
1
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection *
E2-01
Motor rated current
A
270.0
310.0
370.0
500.0
E2-03
Motor no-load current
A
70.0
81.0
96.0
130.0
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
0.029
0.025
0.020
0.014
L2-02
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB)
time
s
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
°C
108
95
100
108
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 11 kW.
* If C6-02 is set to 0, 1, or F and the initial value of C6-03 and C6-04 is 2.0 kHz, the initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz,
4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more, the
Inverter rated current will need to be reduced.
5-50
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Constant Settings by
Function
Application Selections..................................................6-2
Frequency Reference ..................................................6-5
Run Command.............................................................6-9
Stopping Methods ...................................................... 6-11
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........6-16
Adjusting Frequency References...............................6-22
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ..6-25
Frequency Detection..................................................6-26
Improved Operating Efficiency...................................6-28
Machine Protection ....................................................6-30
Automatically Restart.................................................6-38
Inverter Protection .....................................................6-47
Input Terminal Functions............................................6-51
Output Terminal Functions......................................... 6-63
Monitor Constants......................................................6-66
Individual Functions ...................................................6-68
Digital Operator Functions ....................................... 6-102
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Application Selections
Setting the Carrier Frequency
Using the following constants the carrier frequency setting can be fitted to the applications requirements.
Related Constants
No.
Constant
No.
Name
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
C6-03
Carrier frequency upper limit
Details
Selects the carrier frequency.
Select F to enable detailed settings using constants C6-03 to
C6-05.
Sets the upper and lower carrier frequency limits in kHz.
Set the carrier wave gain as shown below.
Factory
Setting
Changes
During
Operation?
Access
Level
0 to F
6*1
No
Q
2.0 to
15.0
15.0 kHz
*1
No
A
15.0 kHz
No
A
No
A
*2 *3
Carrier frequency
Output frequency x
(C6-05) x K
Output frequency
C6-04
Setting
Range
0.4 to
15.0
Carrier frequency lower limit
*2 *3
*1
(Maximum output frequency)
C6-05
Carrier frequency
proportional gain
K is the coefficient determined by the set value in
C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz : K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
00 to 99
*3
00
* 1. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
* 2. The setting ranges depend on the Inverter capacity.
* 3. Can be set and referenced only when C6-02 is set to F.
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions:
• If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following
values as guidelines.
Wiring Length
50 m or less
100 m or less
Over 100 m
C6-02 (carrier frequency)
setting
0 to 6 (15 kHz)
0 to 4 (10 kHz)
0 to 2 (5 kHz)
• If speed and torque vary at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
• If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Set the carrier frequency low.
• If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
• If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
• The carrier frequency can be set to vary depending on the output frequency as shown in the following dia-
gram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04 (Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and
C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
6-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Application Selections
Carrier Frequency
C6-03
C6-04
Output frequency x C6-05
x K*
Output frequency
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency
Fig 6.1
*K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K=1
• To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
• If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) > 6 and C6-03 < C6-04 an OPE11 fault (Data setting
error) will occur.
6-3
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Current Level
The inverter overload capability depends among other things on the carrier frequency setting. If the carrier
frequency setting is higher than the factory setting, the overload current capability must be reduced as shown
in the tables below.
20P4
Initial carrier
frequency setting
6 (15 kHz)
Maximum carrier
frequency setting
6 (15 kHz)
20P7
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
21P5
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
22P2
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
23P7
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
25P5
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
27P5
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
2011
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
2015
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
2018
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
2022
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
2030
4 (10 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
80 %
2037
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
2045
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
2055
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
2075
3 (5 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
–
2090
3 (5 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
–
2110
1 (2 kHz)
1 (2 kHz)
–
40P4
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
40P7
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
41P5
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
42P2
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
43P7
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
44P0
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
45P7
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
47P5
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
4011
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
4015
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
4018
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
4022
6 (15 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
–
4030
4 (10 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
80 %
4037
4 (10 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
80 %
4045
4 (10 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
80 %
4055
4 (10 kHz)
6 (15 kHz)
80 %
4075
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
4090
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
4110
3 (8 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
4132
2 (5 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
75 %
4160
2 (5 kHz)
4 (10 kHz)
80 %
4185
2 (5 kHz)
–
–
4220
1 (2.5 kHz)
–
–
4300
1 (2.5 kHz)
–
–
Inverter Type
Current derating %
–
6-4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Frequency Reference
Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source
Set constant b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
b1-01
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Set the frequency reference source
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Reference selection
Input the Frequency Reference from the Digital Operator
When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the frequency reference from the Digital Operator.
For details on setting the frequency reference, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Fig 6.2 Frequency Setting Display
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input),
or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only
If inputting the master speed frequency reference only, input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal
A1.
Inverter
2 kΩ
+V (Power supply: 15 V, 20 mA)
2 kΩ
A1 (Master frequency reference)
A2 (Auxiliary frequency reference)
AC (Analog common)
Fig 6.3 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input
6-5
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2-Step Switching: Master/Auxiliary
If 2-step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies is performed, input the master speed frequency reference to control circuit terminal A1, and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2.
When terminal S3 (multi-step speed command 1) is OFF, terminal A1 input (master speed frequency reference) will be the Inverter frequency reference, and when terminal S3 is ON, terminal A2 input (auxiliary
speed frequency reference) will be the Inverter frequency reference.
Inverter
Master/
Auxiliary
S3 Multi-step speed
command 1
SN Digital input neutral
2 kΩ
2 kΩ
0 to 10 V input
0 to 10 V
input
2 kΩ
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
A1 (Master frequency
reference)
A2 (Auxiliary frequency
reference)
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.4 Master/Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input
Setting Precautions
When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, turn OFF pin 2 on DIP switch S1 to switch to voltage input
(factory setting is ON).
Inputting Frequency Reference Using Current
When b1-01 is set to 1, the frequency reference can be input from control circuit terminal A2. Input the current
(4 to 20 mA) in control circuit terminal A2.
When H3-09 (Multi-Function analog input terminal A2 function selection) is set to 0 (factory setting) the
input on A2 is added to A1.
Inverter
+V (Power supply: 15 V, 20 mA)
4 to 20 mA input
A1 (Auxiliary frequency
reference)
A2 (Master frequency
reference)
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.5 Frequency Reference Using Current
Setting Precautions
• When inputting a current signal to terminal A2, turn ON pin 2 on DIP switch S1 (factory setting: ON).
• If using terminal A2 to input the master speed reference and terminal A1 to input the auxiliary frequency
reference, set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 Switching) to 1.
6-6
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Frequency Reference
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
With Varispeed-E7 series Inverters, you can change the speed to a maximum of 5 steps, using 4 multi-step frequency references, and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 5-step operation using multi-step
references 1 and 2 and jog frequency selection functions.
Related Constants
To switch frequency references, set multi-step references 1 and 2 and the jog reference selection in the
multi-function contact inputs.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-04)
Terminal
Constant Number
Set Value
S4
H1-02
3
Multi-step speed command 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when
multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).)
S5
H1-03
4
Multi-step speed command 2
S6
H1-04
6
Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed command)
Details
Combining Multi-Step Speed References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs
You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S6 (multi-function
contact input terminals) . The following table shows the possible combinations.
TerminalS4
TerminalS5
TerminalS6
Speed
Multi-step Speed
Command 1
Multi-step Speed
Command 2
Jog Frequency
Selection
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency
2
ON
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency
3
OFF
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 3 d1-03
4
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 4 d1-04
–
*
5
–
ON
Selected Frequency
Jog frequency d1-17
* Terminal S6's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed commands.
Setting Precautions
When setting analog inputs to step 1 and step 2, observe the following precautions.
• When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1 set b1-01 to 1, when setting d1-01 (Frequency Reference
1) to step 1 set b1-01 to 0.
• When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 2 set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When
setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2 set H3-09 to 1F (do not use analog inputs).
6-7
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Connection Example and Time Chart
The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step
operation.
Inverter
Forward/stop
Reverse/stop
Error reset
Multi-step command 1
Multi-step command 2
Jog frequency
External fault
SN Digital input neutral
Fig 6.6 Control Circuit Terminal During 5-step Operation
Frequency
reference 4
Frequenzsollwert
Frequency
reference 3
Frequency
reference 2
Frequency
reference 1
Forward/stop
Jog frequency
OFF
ON
Multi-step speed
command 1
OFF
Multi-step speed
command 2
OFF
Jog frequency selection
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Fig 6.7 Multi-step speed command/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart
Note:
• The multifunction input setting “Jog Frequency 2” (69) can be used for jog frequency selection when a
3-wire control is used for the control circuit. If it is selected while the inverter is initialized to 2-wire control an OPE03 error will be displayed.
6-8
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Run Command
Run Command
This section explains input methods for the run command.
Selecting the Run Command Source
Set constant b1-02 to select the source for the run command.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
b1-02
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Set the run command source.
0: Digital operator
1: Control circuit terminal (digital multifunction inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Name
Operation method selection
Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator
When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP, and
FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals
When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Control
The factory setting is set to a 2-wire control. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward operation
will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control circuit
terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter will
stop.
Forward/Stop
Inverter
Reverse/Stop
SN Digital input neutral
Fig 6.8 2-Wire Control Wiring Example with Positive Logic
6-9
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Performing Operations Using 3-Wire Control
When any constant from H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7) is set to 0, terminals S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire control, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set to 0 works
as a forward/reverse selection command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the input terminal for the forward/reverse run command.
Stop switch
(NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
Run command (operates when ON)
Stop command (stopped when ON)
Forward/reverse command (multi-function input)
SN
Digital input neutral
Fig 6.9 3-Wire Control Wiring Example
50 ms min.
Run command
Can be either ON or OFF
OFF
(stopped)
Stop command
OFF (forward)
Forward/reverse command
ON (reverse)
Motor speed
Stop
Forward
Reverse
Stop
Forward
Fig 6.10 Three-wire Control Time Chart
Use a control circuit that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command. This will make the
run command self-holding in the Inverter.
INFO
6-10
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Stopping Methods
Stopping Methods
This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter.
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input
There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is input:
• Deceleration to stop
• Coast to stop
• DC braking stop
• Coast to stop with timer
Set constant b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to 3
0
No
Q
b1-03
Stopping method selection
Select stopping method when stop command is given.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than coast to stop, without regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run commands are ignored
during deceleration time.)
b2-01
Zero speed level (DC injection
braking starting frequency)
Set the frequency at which the DC injection braking starts
in units of Hz when b1-03 is set to 0 (deceleration to stop).
DC injection braking starts from E1-09 when b2-01 <
E1-09.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
No
A
b2-02
DC injection braking current
Set the DC injection braking current as a percentage, taking the Inverter rated current as 100%.
0 to
100
50%
No
A
b2-04
DC injection braking time at stop
Set the DC injection braking time at stop.
Use when stopping if rotations continue due to the
machines inertia.
Set to 0.00 to disable DC injection braking time at stop.
0.00
to
10.00
0.50 s
No
A
6-11
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Deceleration to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decelerates to stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration Time
1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied
using the DC current set in b2-02 for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-16 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times.
Run command
Output frequency
Decelerates to stop
deceleration time
DC injection brake
DC injection brake
time when
stopping (b2-04)
Fig 6.11 Deceleration to Stop
Coast to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output
voltage is switched off. The motor coasts to stop.
Run command
ON
OFF
Output frequency
Inverter output frequency interrupted
Fig 6.12 Coast to Stop
After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has
elapsed.
INFO
6-12
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Stopping Methods
DC Braking Stop
After the stop command is input and the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) has elapsed, DC injection will be
applied to the motor. The applied DC injection current is programmed in parameter b2-02. The DC injection
brake time depends on the set value of b2-04 and on the output frequency at the moment the stop command is
input.
DC injection brake time
Run command
OFF
ON
Output frequency
b2-04 x 10
Inverter output voltage interrupted
DC injection brake
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)
DC injection brake time
b2-04
Output frequency at
stop command input
10%
100% (maximum output frequency
Fig 6.13 DC Injection Braking Stop
Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.
INFO
Coast to Stop with Timer
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output
is switched off so that the motor coasts to stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored
until the time T has elapsed. The time T depends on the output frequency when the stop command is input and
on the deceleration time.
Operation wait time T
Run command
Deceleration time
(e.g., C1-02)
Output frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
Operation wait time T
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)
Minimum output frequency
Output frequency at
stop command input
100% (Maximum output frequency)
Fig 6.14 Coast to Stop with Timer
6-13
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Using the DC Injection Brake
Set constant b2-03 to apply DC injection to the motor, before it starts to accelerate. Applying DC injection at
start will stop the motor before starting if it was coasting through inertia or wind mill effect.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set constant b2-04 to apply a DC injection brake to the motor at stopping. It prevents the motor from coasting
when it would not be stopped completely using the normal deceleration. This can occur if the inertia is very
high. The DC injection brake can be disabled by setting b2-04 to 0.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
b2-01
DC injection braking starting frequency
Used to set the frequency at which DC injection braking
starts in units of Hz when b1-03 is set to 0 (deceleration to
stop).
When b2-01 is less than E1-09, E1-09 becomes the DC
injection braking starting frequency.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
No
A
b2-02
DC injection braking current
Set the DC Injection Braking Current as a percentage of
the Inverter rated current.
0 to
100
50%
No
A
b2-03
DC injection braking time at start
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at
start.
Used to stop coasting motor and restart it. When the set
value is 0, DC injection braking at start is not performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
No
A
b2-04
DC injection braking time at stop
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at
stop in units of 1 second. Used to prevent coasting after
the stop command is input. When the set value is 0.00, DC
injection braking at stop is not performed.
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
No
A
Motor Pre-heat Function
The motor pre-heat function can be used to prevent e.g. moisture inside the motor due to condensation. The
pre-heat current can be set in b2-09. Using a digital input which is set for motor pre-heat (H1-=60) the
function can be enabled or disabled.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
b2-09
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Sets the DC current level when the motor pre-heat function
is enabled using a digital input.
0 to 100
0%
No
A
Name
Motor pre-heat current
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set value
60
Function
Motor pre-heat command
6-14
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Stopping Methods
The time chart for motor pre-heat is shown below.
Motor pre-heat
RUN
Output frequency
b2-09
b2-09
Motor pre-heat
Motor pre-heat
Fig 6.15 DC Injection Brake Time Chart
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to stop using the
deceleration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function
input terminal (H1-) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function
input terminal (H1-) to 17.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has
stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
Constant
Number
Name
C1-09
Emergency stop time
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Sets the deceleration time when the multi-function input “
Emergency (fast) stop” is ON.
This time will be used when a fault is detected, for which
emergency stop was programmed as stoping method.
0.0 to
6000.0
10.0 s
No
A
6-15
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter.
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Acceleration time indicates the time to increase the output frequency from 0% to 100% of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). Deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the output frequency from 100% to
0% of (E1-04). The accel./decel. times 1 are used with the factory setting, the accel./decel. times 2 can be
selected using a multifunction input.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
Name
C1-01
Acceleration time 1
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum output frequency.
C1-02
Deceleration time 1
Sets the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to fall from 100% to 0%.
Setting
Range
Description
0.0 to
6000.0
C1-03
Acceleration time 2
Sets the acceleration time when multi-function input
"Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" is ON.
C1-04
Deceleration time 2
Sets the deceleration time when multi-function input
"Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1" is ON.
C1-11
Acceleration/deceleration time
switching frequency
Sets the frequency at which acceleration/deceleration time
switches automatically.
Less than set frequency: Acceleration/deceleration time 2
Set frequency or above: Acceleration/deceleration time 1
Multi-function input "Acceleration/deceleration time
selection 1" is given priority.
C2-01
S-curve characteristic time at
acceleration start
Sets the S-curve characteristic time for each part in seconds.
When you set the S-curve characteristic time, the start time
and end time S-curve characteristic time's acceleration
time is lengthened by 1/2 only.
Run
command
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time at
acceleration end
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Yes
Q
Yes
Q
Yes
A
Yes
A
10.0 s
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
OFF
ON
Output frequency
C2-02
C2-01
Time
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal
Commands
Two different acceleration times and deceleration times can be set. When one multi-function input terminal
(H1-) is set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration
time even during operation by changing the ON/OFF status of this terminal.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Selection 1 Terminal
Acceleration Time
Deceleration Time
OFF
C1-01
C1-02
ON
C1-03
C1-04
6-16
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically
Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the output frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration
time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output frequency
Acceleration/deceler
ation time switching
frequency (C1-11)
C1-03
C1-01
C1-02
C1-04
When output frequency ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 2 (C1-03, C1-04).
Fig 6.16 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and
stopping the machine.
Two S-curve characteristic times can be set: At acceleration start and at acceleration end. For deceleration
start and end the S-curve times are fixed to 0.2 sec.
When S-curve is set, calculate acceleration/deceleration time as follows:
Accel. time
INFO
Decel. time =
= C2-01 + C2-02
2
0.2 s
+ C1-01/03
+ C1-02/04
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Forward
Reverse
Output frequency
Fig 6.17 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
6-17
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration
(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is applied
to the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If you set L3-01 to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current reaches 85 % of the set value in L3-02, the
acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, the acceleration will stop.
If you set L3-01 to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor accelerates so that the current is held at a level of 50 %
of the inverter rated current. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
L3-01
Stall prevention selection during
acceleration
0: Disabled (Accelerates according to the setting. Motor
may stall if the load is too high.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stops when the level set in
L3-02 is exceeded. Acceleration continues when
current value falls below the level set in L3-02.)
2: Optimum adjustment (Adjusts acceleration using the
current level set in L3-02 as reference. The
acceleration time setting is ignored.)
0 to 2
1
No
A
L3-02
Stall prevention level during
acceleration
Set as a percentage taking the Inverter rated current to be
100%.
Normally, it is not necessary to change this setting. Lower
the set value if the motor stalls using the factory setting.
0 to 200
120%
No
A
Constant
Number
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during
acceleration
Time
Output frequency
*1.
*2.
* 1. The acceleration rate is lowered.
* 2. The acceleration is stopped to reduce the output current.
Time
Fig 6.18 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
6-18
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Setting Precautions
• If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity or if the inverter is operated using the fac-
tory settings and the motor stalls, lower the set value of L3-02.
• If using the motor in the constant output range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling. It
will be reduced to a fixed value of 50 % of the inverter rated current.
• Set the constants as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.
Stall prevention level during
acceleration
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during
Acceleration)
50 % of inverter rated current
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)
Output frequency
Fig 6.19 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
6-19
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration
(Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function)
This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the DC-bus voltage to avoid overvoltage tripping.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L3-04
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Stall prevention selection during
deceleration function selection
0: Disabled (Motor decelerates according to setting.
When the deceleration time is too short, there is a risk
of DC bus overvoltage (OV) occurring.)
1: Enabled
2: Optimum adjustment
If using the dynamic brake option (braking resistor units
and braking units), be sure to set constant L3-04 to 0.
0 to 2
1
No
A
Setting the Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration (L3-04)
There are four different settings selectable for L3-04.
L3-04=0: This setting disables the stall prevention function during deceleration. The motor will be decelerated using the time set in C1-02 (C1-04). If the load inertia is very high and an OV fault occurs during deceleration a Braking option has to be used or the time has to be lengthened.
L3-04=1: This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration. The inverter tries to decelerate within
the set deceleration time. It also observes the DC bus voltage. If the DC bus voltage reaches the
stall prevention level the deceleration is stopped and the output frequency is held. When the DC
bus voltage falls below the stall prevention level the deceleration will be continued.
L3-04=2: This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration. The deceleration time set as C1-
is taken as reference. The function automatically tries to optimize the deceleration time by observing the DC bus voltage and shortening the deceleration time. The function does not lengthen the
deceleration time, i.e. if C1- is set too short OV may occure.
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 is shown below.
Output frequency
Deceleration time controlled to
prevent overvoltage
Time
Deceleration time
(set value)
Fig 6.20 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation
6-20
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Setting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the inverter rated voltage and input
voltage. Refer to the following table for details.
Inverter Rated/Input Voltage
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)
200 V class
400 V class
380
E1-01 ≥ 400 V
760
E1-01 < 400 V
660
• When using the braking option, be sure to set constant L3-04 to 0.
6-21
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Adjusting Frequency References
This section explains methods of adjusting frequency references.
Adjusting Analog Frequency References
Gain and bias are among the constants used to adjust analog inputs.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
H3-02
Frequency reference terminal A1
input gain
Sets the frequency as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency, when 10V is input.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
H3-03
Frequency reference terminal A1
input bias
Sets the frequency as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency, when 0V is input.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
H3-08
Multi-function analog A2 signal
level selection
0: 0 to +10V (11 bit)
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input)
3: 0 to 20 mA (9-bit input)
Switch current and voltage input using the switch S1 on
the control terminal board.
0, 2, 3
2
No
A
H3-09
Multi-function analog A2 function selection
Selects the multi-function analog input function for terminal A2.
0 to 16
0
No
A
H3-10
Multi-function analog A2 input
gain
Sets the input levelwhen terminal A2 input is 10V (20mA)
according to the 100% value of the function set in constant
H3-09.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
H3-11
Multi-function analog A2 input
bias
Sets the input level when terminal A2 input is 0V (4mA)
according to the 100% value of the function set in constant
H3-09.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
H3-12
Analog input filter time constant
Sets primary delay filter time constant for the two analog
input terminals (A1 and A2). Effective for noise control
etc.
0.00 to
2.00
0.00 s
No
A
Terminal A1/A2 switching
0: Use terminal A1 analog input as main frequency reference.
1: Use terminal A2 analog input as main frequency reference.
Effective when H3-09 is set to 2.
0 or 1
0
No
A
H3-13
Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Constants
The frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current signals.
If using terminal A1 as an input terminal for the frequency reference value, perform adjustments using constants H3-01 to H3-03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal,
perform adjustments using H3-08 to H3-11. Set the analog input signal level using the constants H3-01 or
H3-08. Refer the following figures for setting the input gain and bias.
Frequency reference
Frequency reference
Terminal A2 input
voltage (current)
Terminal A1
input voltage
0V (4 mA/0 mA)
Terminal A2 input
Terminal A1 input
Fig 6.21 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
6-22
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Adjusting Frequency References
Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 is set to 0 (Frequency Bias), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 input voltage is
added to A1 as a bias.
Frequency bias
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
0V (4 mA/0 mA)
Fig 6.22 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference from
terminal A1 when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10%.
Frequency reference
Terminal A1 input voltage
6-23
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)
• This function allows the prohibition or “jumping” of certain frequencies within the Inverter’s output fre-
quency range so that the motor can operate without resonant oscillations caused by some machine systems.
• It can also be used for deadband control.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Setting
Range
Description
d3-01
Jump frequency 1
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
d3-04
Jump frequency width
Set the frequency center value of the jump frequency settings, in hertz.
Set to 0.0 to disable the jump frequency function.
Make sure that the settings are as follows: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥
d3-03.
Operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited.
Changes during acceleration and deceleration are made
gradually without performing jumps.
0.0 to
200.0
Sets the jump frequency width in hertz.
The jump frequency range is as follows: (Jump frequency
±d3-04).
0.0 to
20.0
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
0.0 Hz
No
A
0.0 Hz
No
A
0.0 Hz
No
A
1.0 Hz
No
A
The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:
Output
frequency
Frequency reference descending
Jump frequency width d3-04
Frequency
reference
ascending
Jump
frequency
Jump
frequency width d3-04
width d3-04
Jump
frequency
3 (d3-03)
Jump
frequency
2 (d3-02)
Jump
frequency
1 (d3-01)
Jump frequency reference
Fig 6.23 Jump Frequency
Setting Precautions
• Set the jump frequencies according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03.
• When constants d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.
6-24
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
This section explains how to limit the motor speed.
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency, use constant d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the frequency reference as a percentage, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Frequency) to be 100%.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
d2-01
Frequency reference upper limit
Set the output frequency upper limit, taking the max. output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
No
A
Limiting Minimum Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate below a given frequency, use constants d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency,
multi-step speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
d2-02
Frequency reference lower limit
Set the output frequency lower limit, taking the base reference to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
d2-03
Master speed reference lower
limit
Set the master speed reference lower limit, taking the max.
output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
6-25
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Frequency Detection
Speed Agreement Function
There are four different types of frequency detection methods available. The digital multifunction outputs M1
to M4 can be programmed for this function and can be used to indicate a frequency detection or agreement to
any external equipment.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
L4-01
Speed agreement detection level
Effective when "fout/fset agree 1", "Frequency detection 1"
or "Frequency detection 2" is set for a multi-function output.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
L4-02
Speed agreement detection width
Effective when "fref/fout agree 1", "fout/fset agree 1", "Frequency detection 1" or "Frequency detection 2" is set for a
multi-function output.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
No
A
• With L4-01 an absolute speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected in both directions
(FWD and REV).
Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 to H2-02
(M1 – M4 function selection)
The table below shows the necessary H2-01 and H2-02 parameter setting for each of the speed agreement
functions.
Function
Setting
fref/fout Agree 1
2
fout/fset Agree 1
3
Frequency detection 1
4
Frequency detection 2
5
6-26
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Frequency Detection
Time Charts
The following table shows the time charts for each of the speed agreement functions.
Related constant
L4-01: Speed Agree Level
L4-02: Speed Agree Width
fref/fout Agree 1
Frequency
reference
fref/fout Agree
L4-02
Output
frequency or
motor speed
L4-02
fref/fout Agree 1
OFF
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 2)
fout/fset Agree 1
(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)
L4-02
L4-01
fout/fset Agree
Output frequency or
motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
OFF
fout/fset Agree 1
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 3)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1
(L4-01 > | Output frequency |)
L4-02
L4-01
Output frequency or
motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 1
ON
OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 4)
Frequency
Detection
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2
(L4-01 < | Output frequency |)
L4-02
L4-01
Output frequency or
motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 2
OFF
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 5)
6-27
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Improved Operating Efficiency
This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.
Torque Compensation for Sufficient Torque at Start
and Low-speed Operation
The torque compensation function detects a rising motor load, and increases the output torque.
The inverter calculates the motor primary loss voltage and adjusts the output voltage (V) to compensate insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. The compensation voltage is calculated as follows:
Motor primary voltage loss × constant C4-01.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
C4-01
Torque compensation gain
Sets the torque compensation gain using the multiplication
factor.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
A
C4-02
Torque compensation delay time
constant
Set the delay for the torque compensation function in ms.
0 to
10000
200 ms
No
A
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01)
Normally, there is no need to change this setting.
Adjust the torque compensation gain under the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (max. applicable motor capacity), increase the
set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this constant so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current range.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant (C4-02)
Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms.
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. Adjust the constant under the following circumstances:
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.
6-28
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Improved Operating Efficiency
Hunting-Prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load.
If high response has the priority to vibration suppression this function should be disabled (N1-01 = 0).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
N1-01
Hunting-prevention function
selection
0: Hunting-prevention function disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function enabled
0 or 1
1
No
A
N1-02
Hunting-prevention gain
Set the hunting-prevention gain multiplication factor.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
No
A
Adjusting the Hunting-Prevention Gain (N1-02)
Normally it is not necessary to change this setting. Adjust the value under the following circumstances:
• If vibrations occur under light load condition increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls reduce the setting.
6-29
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Machine Protection
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's
output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
If the Inverter output current continues to exceed the setting in constant L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor
speed is reduced. Set whether to enable or disable the stall prevention using constant L3-05. Set the according
deceleration times using C1-02 (Deceleration time 1) or C1-04 (Deceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 – 2%, the motor will accelerate again to the set frequency.
Related Constants
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
L3-05
Stall prevention selection during
running function selection
0: Disabled (Operates according to the setting. Motor
may stall when the load is too large.)
1: Enabled--Deceleration time 1 (Deceleration time set in
C1-02 is used.)
2: Enabled--Deceleration time 2 (Deceleration time set in
C1-04 is used.)
0 to 2
1
No
A
L3-06
Stall prevention level during running
Enabled when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2. Set as a percentage,
taking Inverter rated current to be 100%.
Normally, there is no need to change this setting.
Lower the set value if the motor stalls at the factory setting.
30 to 200
120%
No
A
Constant
Number
6-30
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Machine Protection
Detecting Motor Torque
If an excessive load is applied to the machinery (overtorque) or the load suddenly drops (undertorque), you
can output an alarm signal to one of the multi-function output terminal M1-M2 or M3-M4.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B or 17 (overtorque/undertorque detection NO/NC)
in one of the constant H2-01 and H2-02 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection).
The overtorque/undertorque detection level is the current level taking the inverter rated output current as
100%.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to 8
6
No
A
L6-01
Torque detection selection 1
0: Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; operation continues after overtorque (warning is output).
2: Overtorque detected continuously during operation;
operation continues (warning is output).
3: Overtorque detection only with speed agreement; output is stopped upon detection.
4: Overtorque detected continuously during operation;
output is stopped upon detection.
5: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement;
operation continues (warning is output).
6: Undertorque detected continuously during operation;
operation continues (warning is output).
7: Undertorque detection only with speed agreement; output is stopped upon detection.
8: Undertorque detected continuously during operation;
output is stopped upon detection.
L6-02
Torque detection level 1
Inverter rated current is set as 100%.
0 to 300
150%
No
A
L6-03
Torque detection time 1
Set the overtorque/undertorque detection time.
0.0 to
10.0
10.0 s
No
A
Multi-function Output (H2-01 and H2-02)
Set
Value
Function
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO
(NO contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON)
17
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC
(NC contact: Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF)
L6-01 Set Value and Operator Display
The relationship between alarms displayed on the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is
detected and the setting in L6-01 is shown in the following table.
Set
Value
Function
Operator
Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection 1
0
Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
–
1
Overtorque detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning is
output).
OL3 flashes
2
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
OL3 flashes
3
Overtorque detection only with speed agree; output is stopped upon detection.
OL3 lights up
6-31
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Set
Value
Function
Operator
Overtorque/ Undertorque Detection 1
4
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon
detection.
OL3 lights up
5
Undertorque detection only with speed agree; operation continues (warning
is output).
UL3 flashes
6
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
(warning is output).
UL3 flashes
7
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output is stopped upon
detection.
UL3 lights up
8
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output is stopped upon
detection.
UL3 lights up
Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection.
• Overtorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02
Overtorque detection 1 NO
L6-03
L6-03
*Overtorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated
output current (or motor rated torque).
• Undertorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
L6-02
Undertorque detection 1 NO
L6-03
L6-03
*Undertorque detection switch off bandwidth is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated
output current (or motor rated torque).
6-32
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Machine Protection
Motor Overload Protection
The motor can be protected from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay function.
Related Constants
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Motor rated current
Sets the motor rated current of motor 1.
This set value becomes the base value for motor protection
and torque limit. It is an input data for autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*1
1.90 A
*2
No
Q
Motor protection selection
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection
function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection (fan cooled motor)
With applications where the power supply is often turned
ON and OFF, there is a risk that the motor cannot be protected even if this constant has been set to 1, because the
thermal value will be reset. If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter, set this constant to 0, and install a
thermal relay in each motor.
0 or 1
1
No
Q
Motor protection time constant
Set the electronic thermal detection time in minutes.
Normally, there is no need to make this setting.
The factory setting is 150% overload for 1 min.
If the motor overload capability is known, set the overload
resistance protection time during hot start to L1-02.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0 min
No
A
Constant
Number
Name
E2-01
L1-01
L1-02
* 1. The settings range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0.4 kW.)
* 2. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter with 0.4 kW.)
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
Set
Value
1F
Function
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Setting Motor Rated Current (E2-01)
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in constants E2-01 (for motor 1). This set value is the base
current for the internal thermal overload calculation.
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics (L1-01)
Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the application.
Set L1-01 to:
0: to disable the thermal motor protection function.
1: to enable the thermal motor protection for a fan cooled general purpose motor (self-cooled).
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time (L1-02)
Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
The motor protection operation time is the time for that the motor can handle a 150% overload when it was
running with the rated load before (i.e. operating temperature was reached before applying the 150% overload). Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02. The factory setting is 60 sec.
6-33
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation
time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 50 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
(E2-01 is set to 100%)
Fig 6.24 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
• If multiple motors are connected to one inverter, set constant L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect each of the
motors, use a control circuit that switches off the inverter output when one of the motors overheats.
• With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the motor can-
not be protected even if this constant has been set to 1 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset
after inverter power supply switch off.
• For safe overload tripping, set the value in constant L1-02 to a low setting.
Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
To enable the Motor overload pre-alarm enable the motor overload protection function (i.e., L1-01 must be set
set to 1) and set H2-01 or H2-02 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection) to
1F (motor overload OL1 pre-alarm). If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90% of the overload
detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
6-34
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Machine Protection
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs
This function provides a motor overheating protection using a thermistor (PTC characteristic – Positive Temperature Coefficient) that is built into the windings of each motor phase.
Related Constants
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Alarm operation selection during
motor overheating
Selects the operation when the input motor temperature
(thermistor) input exceeds the alarm detection level (1.17
V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (oH3 on the Digital Operator
flashes).
0 to 3
3
No
A
L1-04
Motor overheating operation
selection
Selects the operation when the motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the operation detection level (2.34
V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09.
0 to 2
1
No
A
L1-05
Motor temperature input filter
time constant
Sets the delay time constant for the motor temperature
(thermistor) input in seconds.
0.00 to
10.00
0.20 s
No
A
Constant
Number
L1-03
PTC Thermistor Characteristics
The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.
Resistance (Ohms)
Class F Class H
Tr: Temperature threshold value
Temperatue
Fig 6.25 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics*
* The shown resistance value is for one motor phase. Normally the resistors are connected in series.
6-35
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Operation during Motor Overheating
The operation when the motor overheats can be selected using the constants L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor
temperature input filter time constant in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be
displayed on the Digital Operator.
Error Codes If the Motor Overheats
Error Code
Details
OH3
Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.
OH4
Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04. The fault contact is activated
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature
input) the motor temperature can be detected and OH3 respectively OH4 can be output if the motor overheats.
The terminal connections that are to be used are shown in Fig 6.26.
Inverter
Multi-function
contact input
Fault contact
output
Multi-function
contact output
Branch resistance
18 kΩ *1
Multi-function
contact output
PTC thermistor
*1
The resistance value of 18 kΩ is only valid when a 3-phase PTC with the characteristic
shown on the previous page is used.
Fig 6.26 Terminal Connections for Motor Overheating Protection
Setting Precautions
•
Because this function uses a voltage signal to terminal A2, pin 2 of the DIP-switch S1 on the control terminal board has to be turned to OFF for A2 voltage input. The factory setting is ON (A2 current input).
•
For the same reason the parameter H3-08 (analog input terminal A2 signal level) has to be set to 0 (0-10V
input).
6-36
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Machine Protection
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction and Output Phase Rotation
If the motor reverse rotation is prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted, even if it is input. Use
this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
It is also possible to change the output phase order by changing b1-04 to 2 or 3. This much easier and faster
than changing the wiring if the motor rotational direction is wrong.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
b1-04
Prohibition of reverse operation
Description
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
2: Output Phase Rotation
3: Output Phase Rotation, Reverse disabled
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
0 to 3
0
No
A
6-37
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Automatically Restart
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation after a
momentary power loss.
Restarting Automatically After Momentary Power Loss
After a momentary power loss, the Inverter can be restarted automatically to continue motor operation.
To restart the Inverter after power is recovered, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.
If L2-01 is set to 1, the inverter will restart, when power is recovered within the time set in L2-02. If the power
loss time exceeds the time set in L2-02, an UV1 alarm (DC bus undervoltage) will be detected.
If L2-01 is set to 2, the inverter will restart, when the main power supply is recovered as long as the control
power supply (i.e., power supply to the control circuit) is maintained. Consequently, alarm UV1 (DC bus undervoltage) will not be detected.
Related Constants
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
L2-01
Momentary power loss detection
0: Disabled (DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the power returns within the
time for L2-02. When L2-02 is exceeded, DC bus undervoltage detection.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operating. (Restarts when power
returns during control operations. Does not detect DC
bus undervoltage.)
0 to 2
0
No
A
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru
time
Ridethrough time, when momentary power loss selection
(L2-01) is set to 1.
0 to 2.0
0.1 s
No
A
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB) time
Sets the Inverter’s minimum baseblock time; when the
Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7 times of the motor time
constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting
a speed search or DC injection braking, increase the set
values.
0.1 to 5.0
0.1 s
No
A
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
Sets the time required to return the Inverter output voltage
from 0 V to normal voltage at the completion of a speed
search.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s*1
No
A
L2-05
Undervoltage (UV) detection
level
Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection level
(main circuit DC voltage).
Usually changing this setting is not necessary.
150 to
210
190 V
No
A
Constant
Number
*2
*1
*2
* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.
Setting Precautions
• Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
• To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that RUN commands from
the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
• If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), an alarm UV1 (main circuit under-
voltage) will be detected when the momentary power loss exceeds 15 ms during operation.
6-38
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Automatically Restart
Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of a motor that is coasting without control, and then starts
smoothly from that speed. It is also activated after momentary power loss detection when L2-01 is set to
enabled.
Related Constants
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
b3-01
Speed search selection (current
detection or speed calculation)
Enables/disables the speed search function for the RUN
command and sets the speed search method.
0: Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation
When the search is started, the motor speed is calculated
and acceleration/deceleration is performed from the
calculated speed to the specified frequency (motor
direction is also searched).
Current Detection
The speed search is started from the frequency when
power was momentarily lost or the maximum frequency,
and the speed is detected when the set search current
level is reached.
0 to 3
2
No
A
b3-02
Speed search operating current
(current detection)
Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage,
taking the Inverter rated current as 100%.
Usually not necessary to set. When restarting is not possible with the factory settings, reduce the value.
0 to
200
120%
No
A
b3-03
Speed search deceleration time
(current detection)
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed
search.
Sets the time for deceleration from the maximum output
frequency to the minimum output frequency.
0.1 to
10.0
2.0 s
No
A
b3-05
Speed search wait time (current
detection or speed calculation)
When a speed search is performed after recovering from a
momentary power loss, the search operation is delayed for
the time set here.
If e.g. a contactor is used at the output side of the inverter
set this constant to the contactor delay time or more.
0.0 to
20.0
0.2 s
No
A
b3-14
Bi-directional speed search selection
Can be used to turn off the bidirectional capabilities of the
speed calculation form of speed search. Then speed search
will only be performed in the last known direction.
0 or 1
1
No
A
L2-03
Min. baseblock time
Sets the Inverter’s minimum baseblock time, when the
inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Set the time to approximately 0.7 times the motor time
constant.
If an overcurrent or undercurrent occurs when starting a
speed search or DC injection braking, increase the set values.
0.1 to 5.0
0.1 s
No
A
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
Sets the time required to return the Inverter output voltage
to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search.
Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum
voltage.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s*
No
A
Constant
Number
* Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
6-39
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Multi-function Contact Inputs
Set
Value
Function
61
External search command 1
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed calculation (Calculates the motor speed, and starts search from calculated speed)
Current detection (Starts speed search from maximum output frequency)
62
External search command 2
OFF: Speed search disabled (Start from lowest output frequency)
ON: Speed calculation (Calculates the motor speed, and starts search from calculated speed) (Same operation as external search
command 1)
Current detection: Starts speed search from set frequency (reference frequency when search command was input).
64
External seach command 3
OFF: Inverter is base blocked
ON: Inverter starts operation using speed search (same operation as speed search 2)
Setting Precautions
• When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error will occur. Set either external search command 1 or
external search command 2.
• If performing speed search using external search commands, design the control circuit so that the run com-
mand and external search command are both ON. These two commands must be kept on, at least for the
time set in parameter L2-03.
• If the Inverter output is equipped with a contactor, set the contactor operation delay time in the Speed
Search Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using a contactor, you can reduce the
search time to 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed search.
• Constant b3-02 (current detection level for search completion) is effective only when current detection
speed search is selected. When the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is supposed to
be completed, and the motor accelerates or decelerates to the set frequency.
• If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after power recovery, lengthen the Minimum
Baseblock Time (L2-03).
Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed
• Always perform non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance before using speed searches based on
calculated speeds.
• If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, per-
form stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance again.
6-40
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Automatically Restart
Speed Search Selection
The speed search method can be selected using b3-01. If b3-01 is set to 0 the search method is speed calculation. It has to be activated by a multi-function input (H1- set to 61 or 62).
If b3-01 is set to 1, the search method is speed calculation too, but speed search is performed at every RUN
command and has not to be activated by a multifunction input.
The same is valid for setting b3-01 to 2 or 3, only the search method is current detection and not speed calculation.
Table 6.1 Search Methods
Search Name
Speed Calculation
Current Detection
Calculates the motor speed when the search
starts, and accelerates or decelerates from the
calculated speed to the set frequency. The
direction of motor rotation is also detected.
Starts speed search from the frequency when
the temporary power loss was detected, or from
the highest frequency, and performs speed
detection by watching the current level during
the search.
External search command 1 and external
External Speed Search search command 2 become the same operation
Command
calculation of the motor speed and starting the
search from the calculated speed.
External speed search command 1:
Starts speed search from the maximum output
frequency.
External speed search command 2:
Starts speed search from the frequency reference set before the search command.
Search Method
Cannot be used with multi-motor drives or
The motor may accelerate suddenly with light
with motors two or more sizes smaller than the
loads.
Inverter capacity.
Application Precautions
Speed Calculation
Search at Startup
The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals is shown
below.
OFF
ON
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Run command
Set frequency
reference
Starts using
calculated speed
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
0.7 to 1.0 s
*Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.7*
Note:
If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the run command turns ON in a
short time, the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.
Fig 6.27 Speed Search at Startup (Calculated Speed)
6-41
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time shorter than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
OFF
ON
Start using
speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75 *1
*1. After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.28 Speed Search after Baseblock (Calculated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)
• Loss Time longer than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)
Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long,
operation may be the same as the search in case 1.
Fig 6.29 Speed Search after Baseblock (Calculated Speed: Loss Time > L2-03)
6-42
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Automatically Restart
Current Detection
Speed Search at Startup
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.
Run command
OFF
ON
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency
reference
Maximum output
frequency or
set frequency
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
Minimum baseblock time*
(L2-03)
* Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.30 Speed Search at Startup (Current Detection)
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss time shorter than minimum baseblock time
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Deceleration time
set in b3-03
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
b3-02
speed search operating current
Output current
*1
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)*1
*2
*2
Baseblock time may be reduced by the output
frequency immediately before baseblock.
After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for
the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
Fig 6.31 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time < L2-03)
• Loss time longer than minimum baseblock time
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Set frequency
Deceleration speed set in b3-03 reference
Output frequency
b3-02
Speed search operating time
Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time*
(L2-03)
Fig 6.32 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time > L2-03)
6-43
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency
Reference Is Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function can be used to continue operation at reduced speed using the
set value in parameter L4-06 as frequency reference value. When using an analog input as frequency reference
source, a frequency reference loss is detected, when the reference value drops over 90 % in 400 ms or less.
When an error signal during frequency reference loss shall be output externally, set H2-01 or H2-02
(multi-function contact output terminal M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection) to C (frequency reference
lost).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
L4-05
Operation when frequency reference is missing
0: Stop
1: Operation (L4-06*fref@loss) inverter runs with
reduced speed.
Frequency reference loss means that the frequency reference drops over 90% in 400 ms.
0 or 1
1
No
A
L4-06
Output frequency adjustment after
freq. reference loss
If L4-05 is set to 1 and the reference is lost, inverter will
run at:
fout = L4-06*fref@loss
0 to
100%
80%
No
A
6-44
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Automatically Restart
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function)
If an Inverter error occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no error is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following errors.
• OC (Overcurrent)
• PF (Main circuit voltage fault)
• GF (Ground fault)
• OL1 (Motor overload)
• PUF (DC bus fuse blown)
• OL2 (Inverter overload)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
• OH1 (Motor overheat)
• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)*
• OL3 (Overtorque)
* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
If an error that is not listed above occurs, the protection function will operate and the auto restart function will
not work.
The number of auto restarts is set in parameter L5-01. If a fault occurs the inverter performs the auto restart
corresponding to Fig 6.33. The inverter tries to restart every 5 ms for the maximum time of L5-03. All retries
performed during L5-03 are regarded as one restart attempt.
The internal counting of restart attempts is reset to 0 when the drive has run 10 minutes without fault.
fault
occurance
fault
output
RUN
controller
controller
delay
5ms
retry
function
L2-03
L5-03 (max)
controller
base block
total base
block time
Fig 6.33 Timing Chart for Auto Restart Function
6-45
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Auto Restart External Outputs
To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 or H2-02 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2
or M3-M4 function selection) to 1E (auto restart).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
L5-01
Number of auto restart attempts
Sets the number of auto restart attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed
search from the run frequency.
0 to 10
0
No
A
L5-02
Auto restart operation selection
Sets whether a fault contact output is activated during
fault restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is not activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is activated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
L5-03
Fault Retry Time
Sets the maximum time a restart is tried.
0.5 to
180.0
10.0 s
No
A
Application Precautions
The number of auto restarts counter is reset under the following conditions:
• After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
• After the protection operation has been performed and an error reset has been input.
• After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
6-46
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Inverter Protection
Inverter Protection
Inverter Overheat Protection
The Inverter is protected against overheating using a thermistor that detects the heatsink temperature.
When the overheat temperature level is reached the inverter output is switched off.
To prevent a suddenly and unexpected stop of the inverter due to an overtemperature, an overheating
pre-alarm can be output. The temperature level for that pre-alarm can be set in constant L8-02. Using constant L8-03 the inverter operation when an overtemperature occurs can be selected.
Related Constants
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Overheat pre-alarm level
Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat
detection pre-alarm in °C.
The pre-alarm is detected when the cooling fin temperature reaches the set value.
50 to 130
95°C
No
A
L8-03
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm
operation selection
Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat
pre-alarm goes ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time C1-09.
3: Continue operation (Monitor display only.
4: OH alarm and output frequency reduction (L8-19)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will
be given in setting 3.
0 to 4
4
No
A
L8-19
Frequency reference during OH
pre-alarm
Sets the frequency reference when OH pre-alarm is
detected in percent of the maximum frequency (E1-04).
0.0 to
20.0 %
20.0 %
No
A
Constant
Number
L8-02
Name
Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 and H2-02 (M1 – M4 Function Selection)
Inverter Overheat Pre-Alarm: “20”
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the heatsink temperature exceeds the overheat pre-alarm level set in L8-02.
Input Phase Loss Detection Level
For the Input Phase Loss Detection the drive monitors the DC bus ripple. The drive integrates this ∆V value
over 10 scans (appr. 10 seconds). If the integrated ∆V value of any consecutive ten scan range is greater than
the voltage determined by multiplying L8-06 times the drives rated OV Trip point (400Vdc/800Vdc), a PF
fault will occur and the Drive will coast to stop.
Phase Loss Fault
Signal
DC Bus
Voltage
L8-06
10 seconds
t
6-47
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
L8-06
Input Phase Loss Detection Level
Allowed DC bus ripple before input phase loss is detected
in percent of the OV trip level.
200V class: 400 VDC
400V class: 800 VDC
0.0 to
25.0 %
5.0 %
No
A
Ground Fault Protection
This function detects the earth leakage current by calculating the sum of the three output currents. Normally it
should be 0. If the earth leakage current gets too high, the inverter output will be switched off and a GF fault
is shown on the display. The fault contact is activated.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L8-09
Ground fault protection selection
Description
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
0 or 1
1
No
A
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
It is not recommended to disable this function.
Cooling Fan Control
This function controls the fan that is mounted to the inverters heatsink.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
L8-10
Cooling fan control selection
Sets the ON/OFF control for the cooling fan.
0: ON only when inverter output is active.
1: ON whenever power is ON.
0 or 1
0
No
A
L8-11
Cooling fan control delay time
Sets the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling
fan after the inverter STOP command is given.
0 to 300
300 s
No
A
Selecting the Cooling Fan Control
Using constant L8-10 two modes can be selected:
0: The fan is ON only when the inverter output is ON, i.e. a voltage is output. This is the factory setting.
1: The fan is ON whenever the inverter power supply is switched ON.
If L8-10 is set to 0, the turn OFF delay time for the fan can be set in constant L8-11. After a stop command the
inverter waits for this time before switching OFF the cooling fan. The factory setting is 300 sec.
6-48
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Inverter Protection
Setting the Ambient Temperature
The overload capability of the inverter depends on the ambient temperature. At ambient temperatures higher
than 45°C (40°C for IP20/NEMA1 types) the output current capacity is reduced, i.e. the OL2 alarm level will
be lowered.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L8-12
Ambient temperature
Description
Sets the ambient temperature.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
45 to 60
45 °C
No
A
The ambient temperature must be set in constant L8-12.
OL2 Characteristics at Low Speed
At output frequencies below 6 Hz the overload capability of the inverter is lower than at higher speeds, i.e. an
OL2 fault (inverter overload) may occur even if the current is below the normal OL2 current level (see Fig.
6.34).
OL2 Alarm-Level
Fig. 6.34 OL2 Alarm Level at Low Frequencies
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L8-15
OL2 characteristics selection at
low speeds
Description
0: OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled.
1: OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
0 or 1
1
No
A
Generally it is not recommended to disable this function. Otherwise the inverter life time might be shortened.
6-49
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Soft CLA Selection
Soft CLA is a current detection level for the output IGBT protection. Using constant L8-18 Soft CLA can be
enabled or disabled.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
L8-18
Soft CLA selection
Description
0: Disable
1: Enable
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
0 or 1
1
No
A
Generally it is absolutely not recommended to disable this function.
6-50
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Input Terminal Functions
Input Terminal Functions
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator
and Control Circuit Terminals
You can switch the Inverter run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital
Operator) and remote (input method set in b1-01 and b1-02).
If any input from H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) has been
set to 1 (local/remote selection), this input can be used to switch over between local and remote.
To set the frequency reference source and RUN command source to control circuit terminals, set b1-01 and
b1-02 to 1.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
b1-01
b1-02
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Reference selection
Sets the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
RUN command source selection
Sets the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (digital multifunction inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Name
Description
You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE key on the Digital Operator. When
the local/remote function has been set for one external terminal, the LOCAL/REMOTE key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.
INFO
6-51
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)
Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input
terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF operation,
and thereby to block the inverter output.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operation using the speed search method set in b3-01 (speed
search selection).
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Function
8
External baseblock NO (Normally Open contact: Baseblock when ON)
9
External baseblock NC (Normally Closed contact: Baseblock when OFF)
Time Chart
The time chart when using a baseblock command is shown below.
Forward operation/Stop
Baseblock command
Input
Cleared
Frequency reference
Speed search
Output frequency
Coast to a stop
Fig 6.35 Baseblock Commands
When a contactor between inverter and motor is used, always perform a base block command before
opening the contactor.
IMPORTANT
Multifunction Analog Input A2 Disable/Enable
If a digital input is programmed for this function (H1- = C) the analog input A2 can be enabled or disabled
by switching the digital input ON/OFF (ON – Analog Input A2 enabled).
6-52
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Input Terminal Functions
Drive Enable/Disable
If a digital input is programmed for this function (H1- = 6A) the drive can be enabled or disabled by
switching the digital input ON/OFF (ON – Drive enabled).
If the input is switched OFF while a RUN command is active the inverter will stop using the stopping method
set in b1-03.
The rive Enable/Disable signal has to be ON before the RUN command is activated.
Bypass Drive Enable
If Bypass Drive Enable (70) is programmed into one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 the drive will not execute a RUN command until this input is closed.
Unlike the setting 6A (Drive Enable/Disable) the RUN command does not to be cycled after closing the input.
The drive will start whenever the digital input is closed a RUN command is active with the activated acceleration time.
If a RUN command is active and the Bypass Drive Enable input is OFF the digital operator shows the alarm
message “dnE”.
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration
(Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold)
• When a multi-function digital input is set for Accel./Decel. Ramp Hold (H1-=A*), the input can be
used to pause the acceleration or deceleration and maintain (holds) the output frequency.
• Acceleration/deceleration is restarted when the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input is turned OFF.
• The motor will be stopped if a stop command is input while the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input
is ON.
• When constant d4-01 (the frequency reference hold function selecton) is set to 1, the held frequency will
be stored in memory. This stored frequency will be retained as frequency reference even after a power loss
and the motor will be restarted at this frequency when a run command is input again.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
d4-01
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Frequency reference hold function
selection
Sets whether or not frequencies will be recorded on hold
command.
0: Disabled (when operation is stopped or the power is
turned ON again the frequency reference is set to 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is stopped or the power is
turned ON again the inverter starts at the previous hold
frequency.)
This function is available when the multi-function inputs
“Accel/Decel Ramp Hold” or “Up/Down” commands are
set.
0 or 1
0
No
A
Set
Value
A*
Function
Accel./Decel. Ramp Hold
6-53
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Time Chart
The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.
Power supply
Forward/Stop
Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Hold
Hold
Fig 6.36 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
6-54
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Input Terminal Functions
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals
(UP/DOWN)
The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a
multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7.
To use this function, set two of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7
function selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that
the UP and DOWN commands are used as a pair. Otherwise an OPE03 alarm will be displayed.
The table below shows the possible combinations of the UP and DOWN command and the corresponding
operation.
Operation
Acceleration Deceleration
Hold
Hold
Up command
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Down command
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
The change of the output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration times. Be sure to set b1-02
(Run command selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
d2-01
Frequency reference upper limit
Sets the frequency reference upper limit as a percent, taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
No
A
d2-02
Frequency reference lower limit
Sets the frequency reference lower limit as a percentage of
the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
d2-03
Master speed reference lower
limit
Sets the master speed frequency reference lower limit as a
percent, taking the maximum output frequency to be
100%.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
No
A
Precautions
Setting Precautions
If multi-function input terminals S3 to S7 are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function
input selection) will occur:
• Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
• UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time.
6-55
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Application Precautions
• Frequency outputs using UP/DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower
limits set in constants d2-01 to d2-03. Here, the frequency value from analog frequency reference input A1
becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If using a combination of the frequency reference from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either constant d2-02 or d2-03, the larger limit
value will become the frequency reference lower limit.
• If inputting the run command when using UP/DOWN commands, the output frequency accelerates to the
frequency reference lower limits set in d2-02.
• When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled.
• When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the frequency reference value
using the UP/DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is turned ON and the run command is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has
been stored. To reset (i.e., to 0 Hz) the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command
while the run command is ON.
Connection Example and Time Chart
The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function contact input
terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Constant
Name
Set Value
H1-01
Multi-function input (terminal S3)
10
H1-02
Multi-function input (terminal S4)
11
Inverter
Forward
S1 operation/Stop
S2
Reverse
operation/Stop
S3 Up command
S4 Down command
Digital input
SN neutral
0 to 10 V analog
signal
A1 Frequency
reference lower limit
AC
Fig 6.37 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated
6-56
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Input Terminal Functions
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to
lower limit
Same
frequency
Lower limit
Forward operation/stop
UP command
Reference
frequency reset
DOWN command
Speed agree*
Power supply
* The speed agree signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/decelerating while the run command is ON.
Fig 6.38 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart
6-57
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Trim Control Function (+/– Speed)
The +/– speed function increments or decrements the frequency reference from analog input by the value set
in constant d4-02 (+/– Speed Limit) using two digital inputs.
To use this function, set two of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact terminal inputs S3 to S7
function selection) to 1C (Trim Control Increase command) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease command). Be
sure to allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease command are used as a pair. Otherwise an OPE03 alarm will be displayed.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
d4-02
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Set the frequency to be add to or subtracted from the analog frequency reference as a percent, taking the maximum
output frequency to be 100%.
Enabled when the increase (+) speed command or decrease
(-) speed command is set for a multi-function input.
0 to 100
10%
No
A
Name
+/- speed limits
Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference
The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown
below.
Set Frequency
Reference
+ d4-02
Set Frequency
Reference
- d4-02
Trim Control Increase
Command Terminal
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Trim Control Decrease
Command Terminal
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency Reference
HOLD
Application Precautions
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference
source is an analog input (A1 or A2).
• When the analog frequency reference value - d4-02 < 0, the frequency reference is set to 0.
• If only one of the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a
multi-function contact input terminal, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected) will
occur.
6-58
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Input Terminal Functions
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing
When one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection)
is set to 1E (sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100
ms after the terminal is turned ON, and operation will continue at that frequency.
The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.
Sample/hold
command
Analog input
Frequency reference
Fig 6.39 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency
Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
When using sample/hold of analog frequency reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same
time. Otherwise operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selection) will occur.
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command
• UP/DOWN command
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command
Application Precautions
• When performing sample/hold of analog frequency reference, be sure to close the digital input for 100 ms
or more. If the sample/hold time is less than 100 ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
• The frequency reference value that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
6-59
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Switching Operation Source to Communication Option Card
The source of frequency reference and RUN command can be switched between a Communication option
card and the sources selected in b1-01 and b1-02. Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function
contact inputs S3 to S7 function selection) to 2 or 36 to enable operation source switchover.
If a RUN command is active, the switchover will not be accepted.
Setting Precautions
To use the operation source switching function make the following settings:
• Set b1-01 (frequency reference source) to a value different from 3 (option card).
• Set b1-02 (RUN command source) to a value different from 3 (option card).
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 to 2 or 36.
Setting for one of
H1-01 to H1-05
Terminal
Status
OFF
Inverter
(Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1-01 and b1-02)
ON
Communication option card
(Frequency reference and run command are input from communications option
card)
OFF
Communication option card
(Frequency reference and run command are input from communications option
card)
ON
Inverter
(Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1-01 and b1-02)
2
36
Terminal Status
Frequency Reference and Run Command Source
Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection
OFF
Inverter
(Frequency reference and RUN command source are set in b1-01 and b1-02.)
ON
Communications Option Card
(Frequency reference and run command are enabled from communications Option Card.)
Switching Operation Source to MEMOBUS communication
The frequency reference and RUN command source can be switched between the MEMOBUS-communication via RS-422/485 and the inverter settings in b1-01 and b1-02. Therefore set one of the parameters H1-01
to H1-05 (multi-function digital inputs S3 to S7) to 6B or 6C.
If a RUN command is active the switchover will not be accepted.
Setting precautions
To use the operation source switching function make the following settings:
• Set b1-01 (Frequency reference source) to a value different from 3 (option card)
• Set b1-02 (RUN command source) to a value different from 3 (option card)
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 to 6B or 6C
6-60
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Input Terminal Functions
Setting for one of
H1-01 to H1-05
Terminal
Status
Frequency Reference and Run Command Source
OFF
Inverter
(Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1-01 and b1-02)
ON
MEMOBUS communication
(Frequency reference and run command are input via RS-422/485)
OFF
MEMOBUS communication
(Frequency reference and run command are input via RS-422/485)
ON
Inverter
(Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1-01 and b1-02)
6B
6C
AUTO/HAND Mode Switching by Digital Input
The settings 6D and 6E for H1-01 to H1-05 allow to switch between HAND and AUTO mode by digital input.
Both signals cannot both be programmed simultaneously.
If the Auto Mode Selection is programmed into a digital input, the Auto mode will be selected whenever that
input is closed. The status of the Auto Mode Selection digital input will override any digital operator selections.
If the Hand Mode Selection is programmed into a digital input, the Hand mode will be selected whenever that
input is closed. The status of the Hand Mode Selection digital input will override any digital operator selections.
Using either the Auto Mode Selection or the Hand Mode Selection can only be done when the Drive is
stopped.
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG function operates the inverter at the jog frequency. It can be activated by using the terminal
ON/OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the RUN command.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7
function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
d1-17
Name
Jog frequency reference
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Sets the frequency reference when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG command is
ON.
0 to
120.00
6.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Function
12
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
13
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
6-61
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Application Precautions
• Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands have the priority over other frequency references.
• When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
Stopping the Inverter on External Device Errors (External Error Function)
The external error function activates the error contact output and stops the Inverter operation. Using this function the inverter operation can be stopped on peripheral devices break down or other errors. The digital operator will display EFx (External error [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the number of the terminal at
which the external error signal is input. For example, if an external error signal is input to terminal S3, EF3
will be displayed.
To use the external error function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05
(multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
• External error detection method
• Operation during external error detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in
H1-.
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
Set
Value
20
NO Contact
Yes
21
22
Yes
Yes
Yes
28
29
2A
Yes
Yes
2F
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Coast to
Stop
(Error)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Emergency
Stop
(Error)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2D
2E
Yes
Yes
2B
2C
Yes
Yes
Yes
Decelerate to Stop
(Error)
Yes
Yes
27
Detection
During
Operation
Operation During Error Detection
Yes
Yes
25
26
Constant
Detection
Yes
23
24
NC Contact
Error Detection Method
(See Note 2.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Continue
Operation
(Warning)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note: 1. Sets the input level at which errors are detected. (NO contact: External error when ON; NC contact: External error when OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
6-62
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Output Terminal Functions
Output Terminal Functions
The digital multifunction outputs can be set for several functions using the H2-01 and H2-02 constants (terminal M1 to M4 function selection). These functions are described in the following section.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
H2-01
Terminal M1-M2 function selection
H2-02
Terminal M3-M4 function selection
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Multi-function contact output 1
0 to 38
0
No
A
Multi-function contact output 2
0 to 38
1
No
A
Description
During Run (Setting: 0) and During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
During Run (Setting: 0)
OFF The Run command is OFF and there is not output voltage.
ON
The Run command is ON or a voltage is being output.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
OFF The inverter is not outputting a frequency. (Baseblock, DC injection braking or stopped)
ON
The inverter is outputting a frequency.
These outputs can be used to indicate the inverter’s operating status.
Run command
OFF
Baseblock command
OFF
ON
ON
Output frequency
During run 1 output
OFF
During run 2 output
OFF
ON
ON
Fig. 6.40 Timing Chart for “During RUN” Output
6-63
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Zero Speed (Setting: 1)
OFF The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level (b2-01).
ON
The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level (b2-01).
Output frequency
Zero-speed output
Zero speed level (b2-01)
OFF
ON
Fig 6.41 Timing Chart for Zero-speed
Inverter Operation Ready (Setting: 6)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output will be switched ON when the initialisation of the inverter at startup has finished without any faults.
During DC Bus Undervoltage (Setting: 7)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as a DC bus
undervoltage is detected.
During Baseblock (Setting: 8)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON as long as the inverter output is base blocked.
Frequency Reference Source Selection (Setting: 9)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is ON when the digital operator is selected
as frequency reference source. If any other frequency reference is selected the output is switched OFF.
Run Command Selection Status (Setting: A)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the digital operator
is selected as RUN command source. If any other RUN command source is selected output is switched OFF.
Fault Output (Setting: E)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when any fault different
from CPF00 and CPF01 occurs. The output is also not switched at minor faults. (Refer to Chapter 7 for a
fault list.)
Minor Fault Output (Setting: 10)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when a minor fault occurs
(refer to Page 7-8 pp.).
6-64
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Output Terminal Functions
Fault Reset Command Active (Setting: 11)
If a multifunction output is set for this function the output is switched ON as long as a fault reset command is
input at one of the digital inputs.
Reverse Direction (Setting: 1A)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON whenever the drive is
turning the motor in the direction that corresponds to reverse direction.
OH Pre-Alarm (Setting: 20)
The overheat fault function (OH) is designed to protect the drive from excessive temperature damage. Thermistors attached to the heatsink of the drive monitor the temperature and will fault the drive if the temperature
reaches 105 °C.
An OH Pre-Alarm digital output will close whenever the heatsink temperature reaches the level specified by
parameter L8-02. Parameter L8-03 will determine the drive’s response to reaching the OH Pre-Alarm level
(besides closing the configured digital output).
Drive Enabled (Setting: 38)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when the drive is enabled.
The drive can be enabled or disabled using a digital multifunction input.
During oH and Reduced Frequency (Setting: 3A)
If a multifunction output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON when an inverter overheat
alarm has occurred and the motor is running at reduced speed.
RUN Command from Option Card/Communication Option (Setting: 3B)
If a multifunction output is set to 3B the output will be ON when the RUN command is put in from the built-in
communication (Memobus, N2, PI) OR from a communication option card (SI-P1, SI-N1, etc.). If both RUN
commands are off the output will be open.
Drive Waiting (Setting: 39)
The digital output will close during the timeout period between the input of a RUN command and the expiring
of the delay time specified by b1-11.
6-65
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor constants.
Using the Analog Monitor Constants
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
H4-01
Monitor selection (terminal FM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output (U1-)
at terminal FM.
1 to 38
2
No
A
H4-02
Gain (terminal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 (FM) voltage level
gain.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to
10V output at terminal FM. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10V.
0~
1000.0%
100%
Yes
Q
H4-03
Bias (terminal FM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 0V
output at terminal FM.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10V.
-110.0 ~
+110.0%
0.0%
Yes
A
H4-04
Monitor selection (terminal AM)
Sets the number of the monitor item to be output
(U1-) at terminal AM.
1 to 53
8
No
A
H4-05
Gain (terminal AM)
Sets the voltage level gain for multi-function analog
output 2.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to
10V output at terminal AM. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10V.
0~
1000.0%
50%
Yes
Q
H4-06
Bias (terminal AM)
Sets the multi-function analog output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets the percentage of the monitor item that is equal to 0V
output at terminal AM.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10V.
-110.0 ~
+110.0%
0.0%
Yes
A
H4-07
Analog output 1 signal level
selection (FM)
Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 1
(terminal FM)
0: 0 to 10 V output
2: 4 to 20 mA
0 or 2
0
No
A
H4-08
Analog output signal 2 level
selection (AM)
Sets the signal output level for multi-function output 2
(terminal AM)
0: 0 to 10 V output
2: 4 to 20 mA
0 or 2
0
No
A
Selecting Analog Monitor Items
Some of the digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) can be output at the multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the constant number of
U1 group ( part of U1-) for the constants H4-01 respectively H4-04.
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items
Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and
bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06.
The gain sets the analog output voltage value which is equal to 100% of the monitor item.
The bias sets the analog output voltage value which is equal to 0% of the monitor item.
Note that the maximum output voltage is 10V. A voltage higher than these values can not be output.
6-66
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Monitor Constants
Adjusting the Meter
The influence of the settings of gain and bias on the analog output channel is shown on three examples in Fig
6.42.
Ausgangs-Spannung/
Output voltage
-Strom
Gain: 170%
Bias: 30%
10V
10V/20mA
Gain: 100%
Bias:
0%
3V
3V/8.8mA
3V/8,8mA
Gain: 0%
Bias: 100%
Monitor item
(e.g. Output Frequency)
0V
0V/4mA
100%
Angezeigtes Signal
(z.B. Ausgangsfrequenz)
Fig 6.42 Monitor Output Adjustment
6-67
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
Using MEMOBUS Communications
You can perform serial communications with Programmable Logic Controls (PLCs) or similar devices using
the MEMOBUS protocol.
MEMOBUS Communications Configuration
MEMOBUS communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communications between master and slave are normally started by the master and the slaves respond.
The master performs serial communications with only one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the
address of each slave before, so that the master can perform serial communications using that address. A slave
that receives a command from the master performs the specified function and sends a response to the master.
PLC
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Fig 6.43 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item
Specifications
Interface
RS-422, RS-485
Communications Cycle
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communications Parameters
Baud rate:
Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600 and 19,200 bps.
Data length:
8 bits fixed
Parity:
Select from even, odd, or none.
Stop bits:
1 bit selected
Communications Protocol
MEMOBUS
Number of Connectable Units
31 units max.
6-68
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Communications Connection Terminal
The MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Enable the terminating
resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter (seen from the PLC) only.
S1
RS-422A
or RS-485
Switch
O
F
F
1
2
Terminating
resistance
Terminating resistance (1/2W, 110 Ohms)
Fig 6.44 Communications Connection Terminal
1. Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communications cables, and use proper shield clamps
3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior. See picture below.
IMPORTANT
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC
Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications constants (H5-01 to H5-08) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
6-69
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Related Constants
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Reference source selection
Sets the frequency reference input source
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
b1-02
RUN command Source Selection
Sets the run command input source
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (digital multifunction inputs)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
H5-01
Station address
Sets the Inverter station address [hex].
0 to 20
1F
No
A
H5-02
Baud rate selection
Sets the baud rate for MEMOBUS communications.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
0 to 4
3
No
A
H5-03
Communications parity selection
Sets the parity for MEMOBUS communications.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0 to 2
0
No
A
H5-04
Communications error detection
selection
Sets the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using the deceleration time in
C1-02
1: Coast to a stop
2: Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
4: Continue operation with the frequency reference set in
d1-04.
0 to 4
3
No
A
H5-05
Communications error detection
selection
Sets whether or not a communications timeout is to be
detected as a communications error.
0: Do not detect
1: Detect
0 or 1
1
No
A
H5-06
Send wait time
Sets the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the
Inverter starts to send.
5 to 65
ms
5 ms
No
A
H5-07
RTS control ON/OFF
Enables or disables RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only when sending)
0 or 1
1
No
A
H5-08
Communications Selection
Selects the Protocol for the Communication
0: Memobus
1: N2 protocol
2: PI protocol
0 to 2
0
No
A
H5-09
CE detection time
Sets the time before CE error (Communication error) is
detected when MEMOBUS communication is used.
0.0 to
10.0 sec
2.0 sec
No
A
Constant
Number
b1-01
Name
Description
*
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and
b1-02.
• Monitoring operation status of the inverter
• Setting and reading constants
• Resetting errors
• Inputting multi-function commands. (An OR operation is performed between the multi-function com-
mands input from the PLC and commands input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7.)
6-70
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets
depends on the command (function) content.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
The space between messages must meet the following conditions:
PLC to Inverter
Inverter to PLC
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Response message
Command message
H5-06
setting
5 ms min.
24 bits long
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long
Fig 6.45 Message Spacing
Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 32. If you set 0, commands from the master will be received by all slaves.
(Refer to “Broadcast Data” on the following pages.)
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. The three function codes shown in the table below are available.
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
Function
Command Message
Response Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
03H
Read memory register contents
8
8
7
37
08H
Loopback test
8
8
8
8
10H
Write multiple memory registers
11
41
8
8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the memory register address (test code for a loopback address) and
the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
6-71
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Error Check
Errors during communications are detected using CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy check, checksum method).
The result of the checksum calculation is stored in a data-word (16 bit), which starting value is FFFH. The
value of this word is manipulated using Exclusive OR- and SHIFT operations together with the data package
that should be sent (slave address, function code, data) and the fixed value A001H. At the end of the calculation the data-word contains the checksum value.
The checksum is calculated in the following way:
1. The starting value of the 16 Bit data-word, that is used for the calculation, has to be set to FFFFH.
2. An Exclusive OR operation has to be performed with the starting value and the slave address.
3. The result has to be shifted to the right until the overflow bit becomes 1.
4. When this bit becomes 1, an Esclusive OR operation with the result of step 3 and the fix value A001H has
to be performed.
5. After 8 shift operations (every time when the overflow bit becomes 1, an Exclusive OR like in step 4 has to
be done), perform an Exclusive OR operation with the result of the former operations and the next data
package (8 bit function code). Again the result of this operation has to be shifted 8 times and if needed it
has to be interconnected with the fix value A001H using an Exclusive OR operation.
6. The same steps have to be performed with the data, first with the higher byte and then with the lower byte
until all data are proceeded.
7. The result of these operations is the checksum. It consists of a high and a low byte.
6-72
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
The following example clarifies the calculation method. It shows the calculation of a CRC-16 code with the
slave address 02H (0000 0010) and the function code 03H (0000 0011). The resulting CRC-16 code is D1H
for the lower and 40H for the higher byte. The example calculation in this example is not done completely
(normally data would follow the function code).
Calculations
1111 1111 1111 1111
0000 0010
1111 1111 1111 1101
0111 1111 1111 1110
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 1111 1111 1111
0110 1111 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1100 1111 1111 1110
0110 0111 1111 1111
0011 0011 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1001 0011 1111 1110
0100 1001 1111 1111
0010 0100 1111 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0100 1111 1110
0100 0010 0111 1111
0010 0001 0011 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0001 0011 1110
0000 0011
1000 0001 0011 1101
0100 0000 1001 1110
1010 0000 0000 0001
1110 0000 1001 1111
0111 0000 0100 1111
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 0000 0100 1110
0110 1000 0010 0111
0011 0100 0001 0011
1010 0000 0000 0001
1001 0100 0001 0010
0100 1010 0000 1001
0010 0101 0000 0100
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0101 0000 0101
0100 0010 1000 0010
1010 0000 0000 0001
1110 0010 1000 0011
0111 0001 0100 0001
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 0001 0100 0000
D1H
40H
Higher Lower
Byte
Byte
Overflow
1
Description
Initial value
Address
ExOr Result
Shift 1
1
ExOr Result
Shift 2
0
1
ExOr Result
Shift 3
Shift 4
0
1
ExOr Result
Shift 5
Shift 6
0
1
ExOr Result
Shift 7
Shift 8
1
ExOr Result
Function Code
ExOr Result
Shift 1
1
ExOr Result
Shift 2
0
1
ExOr Result
Shift 3
Shift 4
0
1
ExOr Result
Shift 5
Shift 6
1
ExOr Result
Shift 7
1
ExOr Result
Shift 8
ExOr Result
CRC-16 Result
6-73
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
MEMOBUS Message Example
An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Inverter Memory Register Contents
The content of maximum 16 inverter memory registers can be readout at a time.
Among other things the command message must contain the start address of the first register that is to be read
out and the quantity of registers that should be read out. The response message will contain the content of the
first and the consecutive number of registers that has been set for the quantity.
The contents of the memory register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits.
The following tables show message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and
frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Command Message
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
02H
Slave Address
02H
Slave Address
02H
Function Code
03H
Function Code
03H
Function Code
83H
Start
Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher
00H
Lower
20H
Higher
00H
Lower
04H
Higher
45H
Lower
F0H
Data quantity
08H
1st storage
register
Higher
00H
Lower
65H
Next storage register
Higher
00H
Lower
00H
Next storage register
Higher
00H
Lower
00H
Next storage register
Higher
01H
Lower
F4H
Higher
AFH
Lower
82H
CRC-16
Error code
CRC-16
03H
Higher
F1H
Lower
31H
6-74
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
Loopback Test
The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to
check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave no. 1.
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Command Message
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Function code
08H
Function code
08H
Function code
89H
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
00H
Lower
00H
Higher
A5H
Lower
37H
Higher
DAH
Lower
8DH
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
00H
Lower
00H
Higher
A5H
Lower
37H
Higher
DAH
Lower
8DH
Error Code
CRC-16
01H
Higher
86H
Lower
50H
Writing to Multiple Inverter Memory Registers
The writing of inverter memory registers works similar to the reading process, i.e. the address of the first register that is to be written and the quantity of to be written registers must be set in the command message.
The to be written data must be consecutive, starting from the specified address in the command message. The
data order must be higher 8 bits, then lower 8 bits. The data must be in memory register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message where a forward operation has been set with a frequency
reference of 60.0 Hz for the inverter with the slave address 01H.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Higher
Lower
Higher
Quantity
Lower
No. of data
Higher
Lead data
Lower
Higher
Next data
Lower
Higher
CRC-16
Lower
Start
Address
01H
10H
00H
01H
00H
02H
04H
00H
01H
02H
58H
63H
39H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address
01H
Function Code
10H
Higher
00H
Start
Address
Lower
01H
Higher
00H
Quantity
Lower
02H
Higher
10H
CRC-16
Lower
08H
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
01H
Function Code
90H
Error code
02H
Higher
CDH
CRC-16
Lower
C1H
* No. of data = 2 x (quantity)
For the number of data value in the command message the double value of the data quantity must be
taken.
IMPORTANT
6-75
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast
data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. These data can be read and written. They cannot be used for monitoring functions.
Register No.
0000H
Contents
Reserved
Run operation and input commands
0001H
Bit 0
Run/stop command
1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1
Forward/reverse operation
1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bit 2
External error
1: Error (EFO)
Bit 3
Error reset
1: Reset command
Bit 4
ComNet
Bit 5
ComCtrl
Bit 6
Multi-function input command 3
Bit 7
Multi-function input command 4
Bit 8
Multi-function input command 5
Bit 9
Multi-function input command 6
Bit A
Multi-function input command 7
Bits B to F
0002H
Not used
Frequency reference (Set units using constant o1-03)
0003H to 0005H Not used
0006H
PI target value
0007H
Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726) → 10V = 660
0008H
Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726) → 10V = 660
Multi-function contact output setting
0009H
Bit 0
Contact output 1 (Terminal M1-M2)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Contact output 2 (Terminal M3-M4)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Not used
Bits 3 to 5
Not used
Bit 6
Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7
Error contact (terminal MA-MC)
Bits 8 to F
1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used
Reference selection settings
000FH
Bit 0
Not used
Bit 1
Input PI target value 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bits 3 to B
Not used
C
Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
D
Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E
Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F
Not used
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
6-76
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register No.
Contents
Inverter status
0020H
Bit 0
Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1
Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Bit 2
Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Bit 3
Error 1: Error
Bit 4
Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7
Not used
Bits 8 to F
Not used
Error details
0021H
Bit 0
Overcurrent (OC), Ground fault (GF)
Bit 1
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2
Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3
Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4
Not used
Bit 5
Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6
PI feedback lost (FbL)
Bit 7
External error (EF, EFO)
Bit 8
Control board error (CPF)
Bit 9
Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
Bit A
Not used
Bit B
Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Bit C
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss
Bit D
Not used
Bit E
MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Bit F
Operator disconnected (OPR)
Data link status
0022H
Bit 0
Writing data
Bit 1
Not used
Bit 2
Not used
Bit 3
Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4
Data integrity error
Bits 5 to F
Not used
0023H
Frequency reference
Monitors U1-01
0024H
Output frequency
Monitors U1-02
0025H
Output voltage (U1-06)
0026H
Output current
U1-03
6-77
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Register No.
Contents
0027H
Output power
0028H
Not used
0029H
Not used
002AH
Not used
U1-08
Control terminals input status
002BH
Bit 0
Input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Multi-function input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3
Multi-function input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4
Multi-function input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 5
Multi-function input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6
Multi-function input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 7 to F
Not used
Inverter status
002CH
Bit 0
Operation
1: Operating
Bit 1
Zero speed
1: Zero speed
Bit 2
Frequency agree
1: Agreement
Bit 3
User-defined speed agree
1: Agreement
Bit 4
Frequency detection 1
1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Bit 5
Frequency detection 2
1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit 6
Inverter startup completed
1: Startup completed
Bit 7
Undervoltage detection
1: Detected
Bit 8
Baseblock
1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9
Frequency reference mode
1: Not communication 0: Communication option
Bit A
Run command mode
1: Not communication 0: Communication option
Bit B
Overtorque detection
1: Detected
Bit C
Frequency reference lost
1: Lost
Bit D
Restart enabled
1: Restarting
Bit E
Error (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F
MEMOBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
002DH
002EH - 0030H
0031H
0032H – 0037H
Bit 0
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Not used
Bits 3 to F
Not used
Not used
Main circuit DC voltage
Not used
0038H
^ 100%; resolution 0.1%; without sign)
PI feedback (max. output frequency =
0039H
^ 100%; resolution 0.1%; with sign)
PI input (max. output frequency =
003AH
^ 100%; resolution 0.1%; with sign)
PI output (max. output frequency =
003BH
CPU software number
6-78
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
Register No.
003CH
Contents
Flash software number
Communications error details
Bit 0
CRC error
Bit 1
Invalid data length
Bit 2
Not used
Bit 3
Parity error
Bit 4
Overrun error
Bit 5
Framing error
Bit 6
Time-out
Bits 7 to F
Not used
003DH
003EH
kVA setting
Note Communications error details are stored until an error reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).
Broadcast Data
Using broadcast data a command can be given to all slaves at the same time. The slave address in the command message must be set to 00H. All slaves will receive the message. They will not respond.
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Register
Address
Contents
Operation signal
Bit 0
Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1
Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3
0001H
External error 1: Error
Bit 5
Error reset 1: Reset command
Bits 6 to B
0002H
Not used
Bit 4
Not used
Bit C
Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input
Bit D
Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input
Bit E
Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input
Bit F
Not used.
Frequency reference
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
ENTER Command
When writing constants to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications, the constants are
temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Inverter. To enable these constants in the constant the
ENTER command must be used.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable constant data in RAM, and
ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as
enabling the data in RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
6-79
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H.
Register No.
Contents
0900H
Write constant data to EEPROM, RAM is refreshed
0910H
Constant data are not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
INFO
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM is 100,000. Do not frequently execute ENTER
commands (0900H) that write into EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if these registers should be read out, the register address will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
Error Codes
The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Error Code
Contents
01H
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
02H
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
03H
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets (register content) being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data bytes in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
21H
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing constants.
• When writing constants, the constant setting is invalid.
22H
Write mode error
• Attempting to write constants to the inverter during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands during operation.
• Attempting to write constants other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or o2-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
23H
Writing during DC bus undervoltage (UV) error
• Writing constants to the inverter during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.
24H
Writing error during constants processing
Attempting to write constants while processing constants in the Inverter.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function.
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
• When the gap between two blocks (8 bit) of a message exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.
Application Precautions
If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not
return response messages to the master.
INFO
6-80
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the functioning of the serial communication interface
circuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. It uses the connected communications parts of the
send and receive terminals to receive data sent by the Inverter and thereby to check if communication is performed normally.
To perform the self-diagnosis function use the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the inverter power supply, and set 67 (communications test mode) in constant H1-05 (Terminal
S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the inverter power supply.
3. Perform the wiring according to Fig 6.46.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the inverter power supply.
Fig 6.46 Communication Terminals Wiring for Self-Diagnosis
During normal operation, the Digital Operator displays “PASS” on the display.
If an error occurs, a “CE” (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the error contact output will be turned ON, and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
6-81
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Using the Timer Function
The multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7 can be used as timer function input terminals, and
multi-function output terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 can be used as timer function output terminals. By setting
the delay time, you can prevent chattering of the sensors and switches.
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7) to 18 (timer func-
tion input).
• Set H2-01 or H2-02 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection) to 12 (timer
function output).
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
b4-01
Timer function ON-delay time
Set the timer function output ON delay time (dead time)
for the timer function input in 1-second units. Enabled
when a timer function is set in H1- and H2-.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
No
A
b4-02
Timer function OFF-delay time
Set the timer function output OFF delay time (dead time)
for the timer function input in 1-second units. Enabled
when the timer function is set in H1- and H2-.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
No
A
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is
turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output
function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output
Fig 6.47 Timer Function Operation Example
6-82
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
Using PI Control
PI control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combining proportional control (P) and integral control (I), you can even control system with load fluctuation.
The characteristics of the PI control operations are given below.
P element
The output of a P-element is proportional to the input (deviation). With using a P-element
alone it is not possible to eliminate the deviation completely.
I element
The output of an I-element is the time-integral of the input (deviation). With using a P-element and an I-element together the deviation can be eliminated completely.
PID Control Operation
To understand the differences between the PI control operations P and I the output share of each operation is
shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference between the target value and feedback
value) is fixed.
Deviation
Time
PI control
Output of P- and
I-element
I control
P control
Time
Fig 6.48 PI Control Operation
PI Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PI control applications using the Inverter.
Application
Control Details
Example of Sensor Used
Pressure
Control
Pressure information is fed back and constant pressure control is performed.
Pressure sensor
Flow Rate
Control
Flow rate information is fed back and the flow rate is controled with high accuracy.
Flow rate sensor
Temperature Control
Temperature information is fed back and a temperature adjustment control using a
fan can be performed.
• Thermocouple
• Thermistor
6-83
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
b5-01
PI control mode selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3: PI control enabled (frequency reference + PI output)
0, 1, 3
0
No
A
b5-02
Proportional gain (P)
Sets P-control proportional gain.
P-control is not performed when the setting is 0.00.
0.00
to
25.00
1.00
Yes
A
b5-03
Integral (I) time
Sets I-control integral time in 1-second units.
I-control is not performed when the setting is 0.0.
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s
Yes
A
b5-04
Integral (I) limit
Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
b5-06
PI limit
Sets the limit after PI-control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
b5-07
PI offset adjustment
Sets the offset after PI-control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
b5-08
PI delay time constant
Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PI-control outputs in 1-second units.
Usually not necessary to set.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
b5-09
PI output characteristics selection
Selects forward/reverse direction for PI output.
0: PI output is forward.
1: PI output is reverse
0 or 1
0
No
A
b5-10
PI output gain
Sets output gain.
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No
A
b5-11
PI reverse output selection
0: Limit to 0 when PI output is negative.
1: Reverses when PI output is negative.
Limit to 0 is also active when reverse prohibit is selected by
b1-04.
0 or 1
0
No
A
b5-12
Selection of PI feedback signal
loss detection
0: No detection of PI feedback loss.
1: Detection of PI feedback loss.
Operation continues during detection, the fault contact
is not operated.
2: Detection of PI feedback loss.
The motor coasts to stop at detection, and the fault
contact operates.
0 to 2
0
No
A
b5-13
PI feedback loss detection level
Sets the PI feedback loss detection level as percentage
using the maximum output frequency as 100%.
0 to 100
0%
No
A
b5-14
PI feedback loss detection time
Sets the PI feedback loss detection time.
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s
No
A
b5-15
Sleep function operation level
Sets the sleep function start level as a frequency.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
b5-16
Sleep operation delay time
Sets the delay time until the sleep function starts.
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
b5-17
Accel/decel time for PI reference
Sets the accel/decel time for the PI Softstarter (SFS).
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
b5-18
PI Setpoint Selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 to 1
0
No
A
b5-19
PI Setpoint
PI-target value
0.00 to
100.00%
0
Yes
A
0 to 39999
0
No
A
Sets the unit for b5-19, U1-38 and U1-24
0: 0.01 Hz
1: 0.01% (the maximum output frequency E1-04 is taken as
100%.
2 – 39: rpm, set value is equal to motor poles
40 – 39999: User desired display
b5-20
PI Setpoint Scaling
Sets the display value
for 100 %.
Sets the number of
decimal digits.
6-84
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
1 to 2
0
No
A
b5-21
Sleep Function Selection
Sets the operation method of the PI sleep function
0: Output frequency before Softstarter (SFS)
1: Frequency reference/PI target
2: Snooze
b5-22
Snooze Level
Sets the frequency level at which the snooze operation
starts as percentage of the max. output frequency.
0 to 100%
0
Yes
A
b5-23
Snooze Delay Time
Sets a delay timer for the snooze function
0 to 3600
s
0s
No
A
b5-24
Wake-Up Level
Sets the feedback level at which the inverter wakes up from
0 to 100 %
snooze operation.
0
No
A
b5-25
Setpoint Boost
Sets the PI setpoint boost when the snooze mode is activated. If it is reached once the output will be switched off.
The value is set as percentage of the PI setpoint.
0 to 100%
0
No
A
b5-26
Maximum Boost Time
Sets the maximum time the boost operation is performed.
0 to 3600
s
0s
No
A
b5-27
Snooze feedback
PI Snooze function will only be activated when the feedback value is above this parameter setting.
The value is set as percentage of the PI setpoint.
0 to 100%
60%
No
A
b5-28
PI Feedback Square Root Operation
Enables or disables the square root operation for the PI
feedback value.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1
0
No
A
b5-29
PI Feedback Square Root Gain
Sets the gain for the feedback when square root operation is
enabled.
0 to 2.00
1.00
No
A
b5-30
PI Output Monitor Square Root
Selects whether the PI output monitor is shown as square
root value or not.
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
0
No
A
Monitor Items (U1-
)
Constant
Number
Name
Output Signal Level During
Multi-Function Analog Output
Description
Min.
Unit
U1-24
PI feedback value
Monitors the feedback value when PI control is used.
10 V: 100% feedback
0.01%
U1-36
PI input volume
PI input volume
10 V: 100% PI input
0.01%
U1-37
PI output volume
PI control output
10 V: 100% PI output
0.01%
U1-38
PI setpoint
PI setpoint
10 V: 100% PI target
0.01%
U1-53
PI feedback 2
Monitors the feedback 2 value when Differential PI is
selected.
10 V: 100% PI feedback
0.01%
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)
Set
Value
Function
19
PI control disable (ON: PI control disabled)
30
PI control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PI control)
31
PI control integral hold (ON: Integral hold)
34
PI soft starter
35
PI input characteristics switch
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set
Value
Function
B
PI feedback
Max. output frequency
C
PI target value
Max. output frequency
16
PI feedback 2
Max. output frequency
6-85
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
PI Control Methods
There are four PI control methods. Select the method by setting constant b5-01.
Set Value
Control Method
1
PI output becomes the Inverter output frequency.
3
PI output is added to the frequency reference as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency.
PI Input Methods
PI Target Value Input Methods
Select the PI control target value input method according to the setting in b1-01 (Reference Selection).
Normally, the frequency reference selected in b1-01 is the PI target value, but you can also set the PI target
value as shown in the following table.
PI Target Input Method
Setting Conditions
MEMOBUS register 0006H
Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 (enable/disable PI target value from
communications) to be able to use register number 0006H as the PI target value.
Constant setting
If b5-18 is set to 1 the value in b5-19 becomes the PI target value.
If the PI function is used, the frequency reference value becomes the target value, which is set and shown
in Hz on the operator. Nevertheless, internally the PI target value is used in percent. I.e. the following
formula is used:
NOTE
PI target value [%] =
frequency reference [Hz]
max. output frequency [Hz]
• 100 %
PI Feedback Input Methods
Select one of the following PI control feedback input methods
Input Method
Analog input A2
Setting Conditions
Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) to B (PI feedback).
Analog input A1 (Differential Set H3-09 to 16. Analog input A1 becomes the feedback 1 input and the analog input A2
Mode)
becomes the feedback 2 input.
If H3-09 is set to 16, the PI differential mode is activated. Both analog inputs (A1 and A2) become feedback
inputs and the difference between both becomes the feedback value for the PI controller. The monitor U1-24
becomes the feedback 1 monitor, U1-53 becomes the feedback 2 monitor.
In this mode the PI target value automatically is taken from the source set in b1-01 or a multistep speed reference (d1-01 to d1-04).
6-86
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
PI Adjustment Examples
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce Proportional gain (P), and increase integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition
To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
6-87
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If short cycle vibration occurs reduce the proportional gain (P), or increase the PI primary delay time constant.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Setting Precautions
• In PI control, the b5-04 constant is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a
specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, the Inverter response is delayed, and the machine might
get be damaged or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response.
• The b5-06 constant is used to prevent the output value of the the PI control calculation from exceeding a
specified amount. The value is set taking the maximum output frequency as 100%.
• The b5-07 constant is used to adjust PI control offset. The value is set in increments of 0.1%, taking the
maximum output frequency to be 100%. Normally it is added to the PI output value. If differential PI feedback is selected (H3-09=16), it is added to the difference between both feedback values.
• Set the filter time constant for the PI control output in b5-08 to prevent machinery resonance when
machinery friction is great, or rigidity is poor. In this case, set the constant to be higher than the resonance
frequency cycle duration. Increase this time constant to reduce Inverter responsiveness.
• Using b5-09, the PI output polarity can be inverted. If now the PI target value increases the output fre-
quency will be lowered. This function is usable e.g. for vacuum pumps.
• Using b5-10 a gain can be applied to the PI control output. Enable this constant to adjust the amount of
compensation if adding PI control output to the frequency reference as compensation (b5-01 = 3).
• When PI control output is negative, you can use constant b5-11 to determine what happens to the inverter
output. When b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 or 3 (enabled), however, the PI output is
limited to 0.
• Using the b5-17 constant the PI target value can be raised or lowered with an accel./decel. ramp function
(PI soft starter).
The normally used accel./decel. function (C1- constants) is allocated after PI control so that, depending on the settings, resonance with the PI control and hunting in the machinery may occur. Using b5-17
this behaviour can be prevented.
The PI soft starter function can also be disabled or enabled using a multifunction digital input (H1- has
to be set to 34).
6-88
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Frequency Reference
using multi-step
command
D1-02
Sleep function
2 selection b5-21
1
+
0
-
b1-01
4
D1-01
Serial Com
0
b5-01=3
o1-03
+
Fig 6.49 PI Control Block Diagram
PI control is OFF under the following
conditions:
- b5-01=0
- During JOG command is input
- H3-xx=19 and the termnal status is
ON
PI Target
MEMOBUS Reg. 06H
PI target value
1
0
1
0
1
0
Upper limit
Fmax x109%
+
OFF
b5-01=1
0
PI SFS
b5-17
Terminal A1
Sleep Function
Scaling
PI SFS cancel
H1-xx=34
1
2
1
ON
0
b5-11
1
b5-20
PI Set Point
(U1-38)
b5-18
Scaling
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=6B
Lower limit 0
Upper limit
Fmax x109%
2
PI SFS
b5-17
1
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=6B
0
PI Input
Caracteristic
H1-xx=35
0
b5-28
0
0
1
-
PI Feedback 2
(U1-53)
1
P
-
Z-1
0 H3-09=6B
+
b5-29
P
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=6B
PI
Snooze
PI Snooze Level
PI Snooze Function
1
1/t
Proportional 1
gain
b5-02 Integral Hold
H1-xx=31
Sleep function
selection b5-21
2
+
0
0
I-time
b5-03
1
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=6B
I - limit
b5-04
0
+
+
PI delay time
b5-08
1/t
+ +
1
Z-1
Integral Reset
H1-xx=30
0
+
1
PI Output
Caracteristic
b5-09
1
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=6B
PI Snooze Function
+
-
0 or 1
PI
Wake Up
b5-24
PI Wake Up Level
PI offset
(b5-07)
6-89
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
b5-10
+
Z-1
PI Limit
b5-06
PI Output
Gain
0
b5-07
1
0
b5-30
PI offset
PI output monitor
(U1-37)
Individual Functions
1
H3-09=B
0
Scaling
b5-20
1
b5-22
Lower limit
Fmax x109%
PI Input
(U1-36)
PI Feedback
(U1-24)
+
b523
Delay
Timer
+
-
b5-20
+
0
Sleep function
selection b5-21
0 or 1
Scaling
PI SFS cancel
H1-xx=34
1
PI Feedback
Output
frequency
SFS
Reg. 0Fh, bit 1
Constant b5-19
Terminal A2
b5-15
Sleep
Level
Enable / Disable revers operation
when PI output is negativ
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=6B
Terminal A1
b5-01=0
3
Option Card
1
Frequency reference
(U1-01)
RUN
on/off
b5-16
Delay
Timer
PI Control Block
D1-04
The following diagram shows the PI control block in the Inverter.
Frequency Reference / PI Target
PI Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PI control, be sure to use the PI feedback loss detection function. Otherwise if the PI feedback gets lost, the Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
When b5-12 is set to 1 and the PI feedback value falls below the PI feedback loss detection level (b5-13) for a
time longer than the PI feedback loss detection time (b5-14), a Fbl alarm (Feedback loss) will be displayed at
the operator and inverter operation is continued.
When the same happens and b5-12 is set to 2 a Fbl fault will be displayed on the digital operator and the
inverter operation will be stopped. The motor coasts to stop and the fault contact is operated.
The time chart for PI feedback loss detection is shown below.
PI feedback value
Loss detection
level
(b5-13)
Time
No Fbl
detection
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
Fbl detection
Loss detection time’
(b5-14)
Fig 6.50 PI Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
PI Sleep Function
The PI sleep function can be used in two different modes which depends on the setting of b5-21.
If b5-21 is set to 0, the frequency reference/PI target value is taken as an input value for the sleep function. If
b2-21 is set to 1, the output frequency before the softstarter (SFS input, C1-, C2-) is taken as sleep
function input value.
If this value falls below the sleep level b5-15 for a longer time than the sleep operation delay time b5-16, the
inverter output will be stopped. If the value comes back to a value higher than b5-15 for a time longer than
b5-16, the inverter will resume operation.
PI output/SFS input
Sleep operation
level b5-15
Sleep operation
delay time
Internal run command
External run command
Operating
Operation
Sleep operation
delay time
Stopped
Run command has been input
Operation status output
Fig 6.51 PI Sleep Time Chart
The functionality of the Sleep function is also available with deactivated PI controller.
6-90
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
PI Snooze Function
By setting b5-21 to 2 the PI snooze function can be enabled. This software observes the output frequency
(Softstarter output) and the PI feedback value to turn the inverter ON and OFF automatically as the system
requires.
• Snooze Activation
The inverter stops operation when the output frequency (Softstarter output) falls below the snooze level
b5-22 for a longer time than the snooze delay time b5-23 and the feedback value is above the snooze feedback value in b5-27. Before stopping the inverter finally, the PI setpoint is boosted up to temporarily
over-satisfy the load and thereby to avoid a short cycle ON and OFF switching of the inverter. The boost
level is set in constant b5-25 and it is set as percentage of the PI setpoint value, but the maximum time for
boost operation is set in b5-26.
• Wake up
The inverter resumes the normal PI operation when the PI feedback exceeds the wake up level b5-24. The
normal acceleration ramp is used.
PI Setpoint
Setpoint Boost (b5-25)
time
PI Setpoint + b5-25
PI Feedback
Snooze Feedback Level (b5-27)
time
Wake-Up Level (b5-24)
SFS Output Freq.
t < b5-23
normal
decel.
ramp
Snooze Delay
(b5-23)
Snooze Level
(b5-22)
normal
accel.
ramp
time
Normal PI operation
Boost
Snooze
Normal PI
operation
Fig 6.52 PI Snooze Time Chart
Using the constant b5-21 either sleep operation or snooze operation can be enabled. It is impossible to
enable both functions at the same time.
NOTE
6-91
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Square Root Feedback Operation
If parameter b5-28 is set to 1 the feedback value is converted into a value that equals the square root of the
actual feedback. This can be used to control the flow rate when a pressure sensor is used to generate a feedback value. With parameter b5-29 the square root can be multiplied with a factor. Following formula applies:
flow rate = gain (b5-29) x √pressure (head)
So linear connection between the PI target value and the feedback can be realized.
With parameter b5-30 also the feedback monitor can be switched to show a square root value of the actual
feedback.
Multifunction Digital Input Settings: H1-01 to H1-05 (Terminal S3 bis S7)
PI Control Disable: “19”
• When a multifunction input is set for this function it can be used to disable the PI function by switching the
input to ON.
• The PI target value becomes the frequency reference value.
PI Control Integral Reset: “30”
• Using this function the integral share value of the PI control can be reset by setting a multifunction input to
ON.
PI Control Integral Hold: “31”
• Using this function the integral share value of the PI control can be hold by setting a multifunction input to
ON. The value will be hold as long as the input is ON.
PI Softstarter: “34”
• Using this function the PI target value can be raised or lowered slowly using an accel./decel. ramp
function. The accel./decel. time can be set in constant b5-17. The function is active when the multifunction input with this function is ON.
PI Input Characteristic Switch: “35”
• Using this function the PI input characteristic can be inverted by setting a multifunction input to ON.
6-92
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
Energy-saving
To perform energy saving, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Details
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
During
Operation
Access
Level
b8-01
Energy-saving mode selection
Select whether to enable or disable energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
0
No
A
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
Sets the Energy-saving coefficient.
Adjusts the value in 5% steps until the output power
becomes minimal.
0.0 to
655.00*1
*2
No
A
b8-05
Power detection filter time constant
Sets the time constant for output power detection.
0 to 2000
20 ms
No
A
b8-06
Search operation voltage limiter
Sets the limit value of the voltage control range during
search operation.
Set to 0 to disable the search operation. 100% is the motor
rated voltage.
0 to 100
0%
No
A
* 1. The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
* 2. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
Adjusting Energy-saving Control
When the Energy Saving Function is activated the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and
becomes the output voltage reference.
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is preset assuming that motor and inverter capacity are the same. Adjust
b8-04 in steps of 5 % until the output power reaches its minimum. The higher the energy-saving coefficient, the higher is the output voltage.
• To improve the responsiveness when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time constant
b8-05. If b8-05 is set too small, however, the motor rotations may become unstable under light load conditions.
• Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Conse-
quently the motor efficiency has to be controlled. To have optimized efficiency, the search operation varies the output voltage. Constant b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) limits the range for the voltage
search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, a range of 100% is equal to 200 V and for 400 V Class Inverters a range of 100% is equal to 400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation voltage limiter.
6-93
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Setting Motor Constants
Related Constants
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Motor rated current
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become the reference value for motor
protection and torque limits.
It is an input data for autotuning.
0.32 to
6.40
*1
1.90 A
*2
No
Q
E2-03
Motor no-load current
Sets the motor no-load current.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.00 to
1.89*3
1,2*2
No
A
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.
This constant is automatically set during autotuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842 Ω
*2
No
A
Constant
Number
Name
E2-01
Note All factory-set constants are for a Yaskawa standard 4-pole motor.
* 1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
* 2. The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
* 3. The setting range depends on the inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V class inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
Manual Setting of the Motor Constant
Motor Rated Current Setting
Set E2-01 to the rated current value on the motor nameplate.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting
E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot perform tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from
the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting
accordingly.
• E-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
• B-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test repor]t × 0.92 (Ω)
• F-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)
6-94
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
Setting the V/f Pattern
Using the E1- constants the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern can be set as needed. It is not recommended to change the settings when the motor is used in open loop vector control mode.
Related Constants
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Input voltage setting
Sets the Inverter input voltage. This setting is used as a reference value for protection functions.
155 to
255
*1
200 V
*1
No
Q
E1-03
V/f pattern selection
0 to D: Select from the 14 preset V/f patterns.
F:
Custom user-set patterns (Applicable for setting of
E1-04 to E1-10.)
0 to F
F
No
Q
E1-04
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
40.0 to
200.0
50.0 Hz
No
Q
Constant
Number
Name
E1-01
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
Max. voltage (VMAX)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
200.0 V
*1
No
Q
E1-06
Base frequency (FA)
0.0 to
200.0
50.0 Hz
No
Q
E1-07
Mid. output frequency (FB)
0.0 to
200.0
2.5 Hz
No
A
E1-08
Mid. output frequency voltage
(VB)
155 to
255*1
15.0 V
*1
No
A
0.0 to
200.0
1.2 Hz
No
Q
0.0 to
255.0
*1
9.0 V
*1
No
A
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 Hz
*2
No
A
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
No
A
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 V
No
A
Frequency (Hz)
E1-09
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
E1-10
Min. output frequency voltage
(VMIN)
E1-11
Mid. output frequency 2
E1-12
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
E1-13
Base voltage (VBASE)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same
values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for
E1-08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA)
>E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output range. Normally,
this setting is not required.
Sets the output vltage at the base frequency (E1-06)
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The contents of constants E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
Setting Inverter Input Voltage
Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 so that it matches the power supply voltage. This set value
will be the reference value for the protection functions and similar functions (overvoltage level, stall level).
Setting V/f Pattern
The V/f pattern can be selected using constant E1-03. There are two methods of setting the V/f pattern: Select
one of the 14 preset pattern types (set value: 0 to E), or set a user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F.
To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.
6-95
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Characteristic
Constant Torque
Characteristic
Variable torque
characteristic
High Startup
Torque*
Fixed Output
Operation
Application
These patterns are used in general applications where the load torque is fixed, regardless of rotation speed, e.g. for linear
transport systems.
These patterns are used for loads with
torque proportional to the square or cube of
the rotation speed, such as fans and pumps.
Select a high startup torque V/f pattern only
in the following cases.
• The wiring distance between Inverter and
motor is large (approx. 150 m min.)
• A large torque is required at startup
• An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter
input or output.
This pattern is used for frequencies of
60 Hz or higher. A fixed voltage is applied.
Set
Value
Specifications
0 (F)
50 Hz specifications
1
60 Hz specifications
2
60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
50 Hz
3
72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
4
50 Hz specifications, cubical torque characteristic
5
50 Hz specifications, quadratic torque characteristic
6
60 Hz specifications, cubical torque characteristic
7
60 Hz specifications, quadratic torque characteristic
8
50 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
9
50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
A
60 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
B
60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
C
90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
D
120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
E
180 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
* The high start up torque is provided by the fully automatic torque boost function, so normally there is no need to use this pattern.
When you select these patterns, the values of constants E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically. There are
three types of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
• 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
• 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
• 55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.
6-96
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages
by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
1.3 2.5
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
72 Hz
1.5 3
1.5 3
1.5
Set Value 3
• Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
50 Hz
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
Set Value 6
• High startup torque (Set value 8: to B)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
1.3 2.5
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
1.5
1.3 2.5
Set Value B
60 Hz
1.5
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
1.5
90 Hz
Set Value D
1.5
120 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
1.5
6-97
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages
by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
• Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to B)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
6-98
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages
by 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
• Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to B)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
6-99
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern), you can set constants E1-04 to E1-10. If E1-03 is set to
anything other than F, you can only read constants E1-04 to E1-10. If the V/f characteristics are linear, set
E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
INFO
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Fig 6.53 User-Set V/f Pattern
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points:
• When changing control method, constants E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that
control method.
• Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
6-100
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Individual Functions
High Slip Braking
If the load inertia is large the high slip braking function can be used to shorten the deceleration time compared
to the normal deceleration time without using a braking option, e.g. for emergency stops.
The function must be activated by a multifunction input.
Note:
•
The HSB function is not comparable with the normal deceleration function. It does not use a ramp
function.
•
HSB should not be used at normal operation instead of a deceleration ramp.
Related Constants
Constan
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
N3-01
High-slip braking deceleration
frequency width
Sets the frequency width for deceleration during high-slip
braking in percent, taking the maximum frequency
(E1-04) as 100%.
1 to 20
5%
No
A
N3-02
High-slip braking current limit
Sets the current limit for deceleration during high-slip
braking in percent, taking the motor rated current as 100%.
The resulting limit must be 150% of the inverter rated
current or less.
100 to
200
150%
No
A
N3-03
High-slip braking stop dwell time
Sets the dwell time of the output frequency for FMIN
(1.5 Hz) .
Effective only during deceleration with high-slip braking.
0.0 to
10.0
1.0 s
No
A
N3-04
High-slip braking OL time
Sets the OL7 time when the output frequency does not
change for some reason during deceleration with high-slip
braking.
30 to
1200
40 s
No
A
Adjusting the HSB Deceleration Frequency Width (N3-01)
This constant sets the step value that is used for lowering the output frequency to achieve a large negative slip
and thereby to brake the motor.
Normally no adjustments should be necessary. Increase the value if DC bus overvoltage faults occur.
Adjusting the HSB Current Limit (N3-02)
The setting of constant N3-02 limits the output current while high slip braking is active. The current limit
affects the achievable deceleration time.
The lower the current limit the longer is the deceleration time.
Setting the HSB Dwell Time at Stop (N3-03)
At the end of a high slip braking the output frequency is held at the minimum output frequency for the time set
in N3-03. Increase the time if the motor coasts after HSB.
Setting the HSB Overload Time (N3-04)
N3-04 sets the HSB overload time. If the output frequency does not change for any reason although an HSB
command is given, an OL7 fault will be displayed and the fault contact will operate.
Multifunction Input Settings: H1-01 to H1-05 (Terminal S3 to S7)
High Slip Braking: “68”
If one of the multifunction inputs is set to “68” it can be used to activate the HSB function. The inverter will
brake the motor immediately after the HSB command was given. HSB cannot be stopped, i.e. normal inverter
operation cannot be resumed.
6-101
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operator Functions
Setting Digital Operator Functions
Related Constants
Constant
Number
o1-01
o1-02
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Monitor selection
Set the number of the 3rd. monitor item to be displayed in
the Drive Mode. (U1-)
(Not on LCD operator JVOP-160.)
4 to 33
6
Yes
A
Monitor selection after power up
Set the monitor item to be displayed when the power supply is turned ON.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
1 to 4
1
Yes
A
0 to
39999
0
No
A
Name
Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0:
0.01 Hz units
1:
0.01% (Maximum output frequency is
100%)
2 to 39:
rotation per minute (rpm) (Sets the motor
poles)
40 to 39999: User desired display
Set the desired values for setting and display for the max. output frequency.
o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Set digit number excluding
the decimal point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point to
display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0,
set 12000.
o2-01
LOCAL/REMOTE key
enable/disable
Set the run method selection key (LOCAL/REMOTE key)
function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between the Digital Operator and
the constant settings.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
o2-02
STOP key during control circuit
terminal operation
Set the STOP key in the run mode.
0: Disabled (When the run command is issued from an
external terminal, the Stop key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even during run.)
0 or 1
1
No
A
User constant initial value
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the set constants as user initial
values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded user initial values)
When the set constants are recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
0 to 2
0
No
A
Frequency reference setting
method selection
When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator frequency reference monitor, sets whether the Enter
key is necessary or not.
0: Enter key needed
1: Enter key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter accepts the frequency reference
without Enter key operation.
0 or 1
0
No
A
o2-06
Operation selection when digital
operator is disconnected
Sets the operation when the Digital Operator is disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation continues even if the Digital
Operator is disconnected.)
1: Enabled (OPR is detected at Digital Operator
disconnection. Inverter output is switched off, and fault
contact is operated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
o2-07
Cumulative operation time setting
Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated from the set values.
0 to
65535
0
No
A
o2-03
o2-05
6-102
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operator Functions
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
o2-08
Cumulative operation time selection
0: Cumulative time when the Inverter power is on. (All
time while the Inverter power is on is accumulated.)
1: Cumulative Inverter run time. (Only Inverter output
time is accumulated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
o2-09
Initialize Mode
2: Europe
5: PV-E Spec
2 or 5
2
No
A
o2-10
Fan operation time setting
Set the initial value of the fan operation time using hour
units.
The operation time accumulates from the set value.
0 to
65535
0
No
A
o2-12
Fault trace initialize
0: Disable
1: Initialize (= zero clear) after setting ”1“ o2-12 will be
returned to ”0“
0 or 1
0
No
A
o2-14
Energy monitor initialize
Resets the monitor parameter U1-29 and U1-30 back to
zero.
0: No change
1: Reset to zero
0 or 1
0
No
A
HAND key function selection
If set to 0 the HAND button on the digital operator is disabled and the drive will not enter the HAND mode and
start to run when the HAND button is pressed.
0: HAND button disabled
1: HAND button enabled
0 or 1
1
No
A
o2-15
Monitor Selection (o1-01)
Using constant o1-01 the third monitor item that is displayed in drive mode can be selected. This function has
no effect on the optional LCD-operator (JVOP-160).
Monitor Display when the Power Supply is Turned ON (o1-02)
Using constant o1-02 the monitor item (U1-) that is to be displayed on the Digital Operator when the
power supply is turned ON can be selected.
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units o1-03)
Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using constant o1-03. The setting in o1-03 will
affect the display units of the following monitor items:
• U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
• U1-02 (Output Frequency)
• U1-05 (Motor Speed)
• U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
• d1-01 to d1-04 (Frequency references)
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key (o2-01)
Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator.
If the key is disabled, it cannot be used anymore to switch over the frequency reference source or the RUN
command source between LOCAL and REMOTE.
6-103
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Disabling the STOP Key (o2-02)
This constant is used to set whether the STOP key on the operator is active during remote control (b1-02 ≠ 0)
or not.
If o2-02 is set to 1, a STOP command from the operators STOP key will be accepted. If o2-02 is set to 0 it will
be disregarded.
Initializing Changed Constant Values (o2-03)
You can save the current Inverter constant setting values as user-set constant initial values. Therefore constant
o2-03 has to be set to 1.
To initialize the Inverter constants using the user-set initial values in memory set constant A1-03 to 1110. To
clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key (o2-05)
This function is active when frequency references are input from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1,
you can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN keys without using the
Enter key.
Operation Selection when the Digital Operator is Disconnected (o2-06)
This function selects the operation when the digital operator gets disconnected when a RUN command is
active.
If o2-06 is set to 0 the operation is continued.
If o2-06 is set to 1 the output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop. The fault contact is operated. When
the operator is reconnected an OPR (Operator disconnected) is shown.
Cumulative Operation Time (o2-07 and o2-08)
The inverter has a function that counts the operation time of the inverter cumulatively.
Using constant o2-07 the cumulative operation time can be changed, e.g. after a replacement of the control
board. If constant o2-08 is set to 0 the inverter counts the time whenever the power supply is switched ON. If
o2-08 is set to 1 the time when a RUN command is active is counted only. The factory setting is 0.
Cooling Fan Operation Time (o2-10)
This function counts the operating time of the inverter mounted fan cumulatively.
Using constant o2-10 the counter can be reset, e.g. when the fan was replaced.
Fault Trace Initialize (o2-12)
This function can be used to initialize the fault trace by setting constant o2-12 to 1.
6-104
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operator Functions
Energy Monitor Initialize (o2-14)
This function can be used to initialize the energy monitor by setting parameter o2-14 to 1.
HAND Key Funktion Selection (o2-15)
With this parameter the HAND key can be disabled by setting parameter o2-15 to 0. The factory setting is 1,
HAND key enabled.
Copying Constants
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using a built-in EEPROM (non-volatile memory).
• Store Inverter constant set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
• Write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
• Compare constant set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter constants settings (VERIFY)
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
o3-01
Copy function selection
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3
0
No
A
o3-02
Read permitted selection
0: READ prohibited
1: READ permitted
0 or 1
0
No
A
6-105
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator use the following method.
Table 6.2 READ Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
1
Press the MENU key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter programming mode.
3
Select constant o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement
key.
4
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the constants setting display.
5
Change the set value to 1 using the Increment
key.
6
Press the DATA/ENTER key. The READ function will start.
7
If the READ function ends normally, “End” is
displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant
o3-01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the
display returns to o3-01.
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays
and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy
Function.)
Error Display
Meaning
You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.
Read data length mismatch or read data error.
Tried to write constants to EEPROM on the Digital Operator, but unable to perform write operation.
Select READ Prohibited
This function prevents overwriting of the data that are stored in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator. When
o3-02 is set to 0 and o3-01 is set to 1 to perform a write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator and the write operation will be stopped.
6-106
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operator Functions
Writing Constant Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, use the following method.
Table 6.3 COPY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
1
Press the MENU key, and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the programming mode.
3
Select constant o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement
key.
4
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the constants setting display.
5
Change the set value to 2 using the Increment
key.
6
Press the DATA/ENTER key. The COPY function will start.
7
If the COPY function ends normally, “End” is
displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant
o3-01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the
display returns to o3-01.
If an error is displayed, set the constants again. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to
Chapter 7 Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display
Meaning
Inverter product code or Inverter software number are different.
Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter capacity stored in the Digital
Operator are different.
Comparison between the constant written to the Inverter and the constant in the Digital Operator are
different.
After copying has ended, comparison between the checksum value of the Inverter constant area and
the checksum value of the Digital Operator constant area are different.
6-107
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter constants and Digital Operator constant set values, use the following method.
Table 6.4 VERIFY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
1
Press the MENU key. and select advanced programming mode.
2
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the constants monitor display.
3
Select constant o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment key and Decrement
key.
4
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the function setting display.
5
Change the set value to 3 using the Increment
key.
6
Press the DATA/ENTER key. The VERIFY
function will start.
7
If the VERIFY function ends normally, “End”
is displayed on the Digital Operator. Constant
o3-01 is automatically reset to 0, and then the
display returns to o3-01.
If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays
and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy
Function.)
Error Display
Meaning
Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match).
Application Precautions
INFO
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the
Digital Operator.
• Inverter product and type
• Software number
• Inverter capacity and voltage
6-108
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Digital Operator Functions
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator
If you set A1-01 to 0, all constants except A1-01 and A1-04 are write protected, U1-, U2-, and
U3- will be displayed. If A1-01 is set to 1, only the constants A1-01, A1-04 and A2- can be read or
written, U1-, U2-, and U3- will be displayed. All other constants will not be displayed.
If you set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 1B (write constants permitted), you can write parameters from the digital operator when the terminal
that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing constants other than the frequency reference is
prohibited. You can, however, read the constants.
Constant
Number
A1-01
Name
Constant access level
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and setting
A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be read and
set.)
2: ADVANCED
(Constants can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced programming mode.)
0 to 2
2
Yes
A
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, and if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you cannot modify
the settings of constants A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32.
You can prohibit the setting of all constants except A1-00 by using the password function in combination with
setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Constants
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Constant access level
Used to set the constant access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring drive mode and setting
A1-01 and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be read and
set.)
2: ADVANCED
(Constants can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced programming mode.)
0 to 2
2
Yes
A
A1-04
Password
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects constants of the initialize
mode.
If the password is changed, A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to
A2-32 constants can only be changed after inputting the
right password.
0 to
9999
0
No
A
A1-05
Password setting
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
This constant is not usually displayed. When the password
(A1-04) is displayed, hold down the RESET key and press
the Menu key and A1-05 will be displayed.
0 to
9999
0
No
A
Constant
Number
A1-01
Name
6-109
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Displaying User-set Constants Only
The A2 constants (user-set constants) and A1-01 (constant access level) can be used to establish a parameter
set that contains only the most important parameters.
Set the number of the constant to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. Using
the advanced programming mode you can read and modify A1-01 to A1-03 and the constants set in A2-01 to
A2-32 only.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
A2-01
to
A2-32
Name
User setting constants
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Access
Level
Used to set the constant numbers that can be set/read.
Maximum 32.
Effective when the access level (A1-01) is set to User Program (1). Constants set in A2-01 to A2-32 can be set/read
in programming mode.
b1-01
to
o2-08
–
No
A
6-110
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for Inverter and motor problems.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................7-2
Troubleshooting .........................................................7-12
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection,
alarm detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates, and the Inverter output is switched OFF
causing the motor to coast to stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify the fault and to correct the causes.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault before restarting the Inverter:
• Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the error reset signal.
• Press the RESET key on the Digital Operator.
• Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
Overcurrent
The Inverter output current exceeded
the overcurrent detection level.
• A short-circuit or ground fault
occurred at the Inverter output. (A
short or ground fault can be caused
by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
• The load is too large or the accelera- Reset the fault after correcting its
tion time is too short.
cause.
• A special-purpose motor or motor
with a capacity that is too large for
the Inverter is used.
• A magnetic switch was switched at
the Inverter output while running.
Ground Fault
The ground fault current at the
Inverter output exceeded approximately 50% of the Inverter rated output current.
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter
output. (A ground fault can be caused Reset the fault after correcting its
by motor burn damage, worn insula- cause.
tion, or a damaged cable.)
Fuse Blown
The fuse in the main circuit is blown.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
the overvoltage detection level.
200 V class: Approx. 410 V
400 V class: Approx. 820 V
The output transistor has failed
because of a short-circuit or ground
fault at the Inverter output.
• Check the motor and cables for
short circuits or insulation failures.
• Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause.
The deceleration time is too short and
Increase the deceleration time or
the regenerative energy from the
connect a braking option.
motor is too large.
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so that it is
within the inverters specifications.
7-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below
the Undervoltage Detection Level
(L2-05).
200 V class: Approx. 190 V
400 V class: Approx. 380 V
Main Circuit MC Operation Failure
The MC stopped responding during
Inverter operation. (Applicable
Inverter Capacities
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)
Control Power Fault
The control power supply voltage
dropped.
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
• An open-phase error occurred at the
input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input
Reset the fault after correcting its
power supply are loose.
cause.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
power supply are too large.
• A fault occurred in the inrush current prevention circuit.
---
Inrush Current Prevention Circuit
Fault
• The MC in the main circuit failed.
Overheating occurred in the inrush
• The MC excitation coil is burned
resistor.
out.
The MC did not respond for 10 s after
the MC ON signal has been output.
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
• An open-phase occurred in the input
power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
• The wiring terminals for the input
The main circuit DC bus voltage oscilReset the fault after correcting its
power supply are loose.
lates unusually (not when regeneratcause.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
ing).
power supply are too high.
• The voltage balance between the
phases is bad.
(
)
Cooling Fin Overheating
The ambient temperature is too high. Install a cooling unit.
The temperature of the Inverter's coolRemove the heat source.
ing fin exceeded the setting in L8-02 There is a heat source nearby.
or 105°C.
OH: The temperature exceeded the
setting in L8-02 (Stopping method can
be changed by L8-03.).
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped. Replace the cooling fan. (Contact
OH1: The temperature exceeded
your sales representative.)
105°C (Stopping method: Coast to
stop).
Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
Motor Overheating Alarm
The Inverter will stop or will continue
The motor has overheated.
to operate according to the setting of
L1-03.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature
input at terminal A2.
7-3
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Motor Overheating Fault
The Inverter will stop according to the The motor has overheated.
setting of L1-04.
Corrective Actions
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature
input at terminal A2.
The load is too heavy. The acceleraCheck the size of the load and the
tion time, deceleration time, and cycle length of the acceleration, decelertime are too short.
ation, and cycle times.
Motor Overload
The motor overload protection funcThe V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal
high or too low.
electronic thermal value.
Check the V/f characteristics.
The Motor Rated Current (E2-01) is
incorrect.
Check the Motor Rated Current
Setting (E2-01).
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle
time are too short.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Inverter Overload
The Inverter overload protection funcThe V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal
high or too low.
electronic thermal value.
The Inverter capacity is too low.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Replace the Inverter with one that
has a larger capacity.
Overtorque Detected 1
There has been a torque higher than
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the
time in L6-03.
–
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
High-slip Braking OL
The output frequency did not change
for longer than the time set in N3-04.
The inertia of the connected machine
is too large.
Make sure the load is an inertial
load.
Undertorque Detected 1
There has been a torque lower than the
setting in L6-02 for longer than the
time in L6-03.
–
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
undertorque.
PI Feedback Lost
A PI feedback loss detection is
enabled (b5-12 ≠ 0) and the PI feedback input was less than b5-13 (PI
feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PI
feedback loss detection time).
–
• Check the PI feedback signal
source for correct operation.
• Check the wiring.
External fault input from Communications Option Card
–
Check the Communications
Option Card and communications
signals.
7-4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
An "external fault" was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
Remove the cause of the external
fault.
–
Check the connection to the Digital Operator.
External fault (Input terminal 3)
External fault (Input terminal 4)
External fault (Input terminal 5)
External fault (Input terminal 6)
External fault (Input terminal 7)
Digital Operator Connection Fault
The connection to the Digital Operator
was broken during operation using the
operator as RUN command source.
MEMOBUS Communications Error
A normal receive was not possible for
2 s or longer after control data were
received once.
Option Communications Error
A communications error was detected
during a run command or while setting
a frequency reference from a Communications Option Card.
Digital Operator Communications
Error 1
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5
seconds after the power was turned
on.
CPU External RAM Fault
Digital Operator Communications
Error 2
After communications were established, there was a communications
error with the Digital Operator for
more than 2 seconds.
Baseblock circuit error
–
–
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
–
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuits were destroyed.
Replace the Inverter.
The Digital Operator isn't connected
properly.
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
–
–
The control circuit is damaged.
CPU internal A/D converter error
Check the communications
devices and communications signals.
The Digital Operator's connector isn't
connected properly.
The control circuit is damaged.
EEPROM error
Check the communications
devices and communications signals.
–
The control circuit is damaged.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
7-5
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
CPU internal A/D converter error
Option Card connection error
ASIC internal RAM fault
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
-
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
The Option Card is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
The Inverter or Option Card is faulty.
Replace the Option Card or the
Inverter.
-
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
Watchdog timer fault
The control circuit is damaged.
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault
ASIC version fault
Communications Option Card A/D
converter error
-
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
The Inverter control circuit is faulty
Replace the Inverter.
The Option Card is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
The Option Card's A/D converter is
faulty.
Replace the Communications
Option Card.
Communications Option Card fault.
Replace the Option Card.
Communications Option Card self
diagnostic error
Communications Option Card
model code error
Communications Option Card
DPRAM error
7-6
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The
system will automatically returned to its original status when the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display flashes and the alarm can be output at the multi-function outputs (H2-01 or H202).
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing
Display
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
Both the forward and reverse run commands have been ON for more than
0.5 s.
–
Check the sequence of the forward and
reverse run commands.
Since the rotational direction is
unknown, the motor will be decelerated to a stop when this minor fault
occurs.
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred
when there was no Run signal.
• The main circuit DC voltage was
below the Undervoltage Detection
Level Setting (L2-05).
• The inrush current limiting resistor
bypass contactor opened.
• The control power supply voltage
when below the CUV level.
See causes for UV1, UV2, and UV3
faults in the previous table.
See corrective actions for UV1, UV2,
and UV3 faults in the previous table.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
Decrease the voltage so it's within
the overvoltage detection level.
The power supply voltage is too high.
specifications.
200 V class: Approx. 400 V
400 V class: Approx. 800 V
The ambient temperature is too high.
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
Install a cooling unit.
Cooling Fin Overheating
There is a heat source nearby.
Remove the heat source
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fin exceeded the setting in L8-02.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your
The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
Yaskawa representative.)
Motor overheating
H3-09 is set to “E” and the motor temThe motor has overheated.
perature thermistor input exceeded the
alarm detection level.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature input on
terminal A2.
Overtorque 1
There has been a torque higher than
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the
time in L6-03.
–
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02
and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.
External error detected for Communications Card other than SI-K2
Continuing operation was specified
for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external
fault was input from the Option Card.
–
Remove the cause of the external fault.
7-7
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S3)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S4)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S5)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S6)
(blinking)
External fault (Input terminal S7)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
(blinking)
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
An external fault was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
Remove the cause of the external fault.
PI Feedback Lost
A PI feedback loss detection is
enabled (b5-12 ≠ 0) and the PI feedback input was less than b5-13 (PI
feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PI
feedback loss detection time).
–
–
MEMOBUS Communications Error
Normal receive was not possible for 2
s or longer after received control data.
–
Check the communications devices
and signals.
Option Card Communications
Error
A communications error occurred in a
mode where the run command or a
frequency reference is set from an
Communications Option Card.
–
Check the communications devices
and signals.
Communications on Standby
Control data was not normally
received when power was turned ON.
–
Check the communications devices
and signals.
(blinking)
Drive not enabled
An digital input is programmed to 6A
(Drive Enable) or 70 (Bypass Drive
Check the wiring and sequence of the
Enable) and a RUN command was
external signals.
input while the drive was not enabled.
(blinking)
Cannot Reset
It is tried to reset a fault while a RUN
Remove the RUN command and reset.
command is still active.
7-8
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two constant settings. It
won't be possible to start the Inverter until the constants have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault
contact outputs will not operate.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the
errors.
Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
Display
Meaning
Incorrect settings
Incorrect Inverter
capacity setting
The Inverter capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. Check constant o2-04 for the
correct setting.
Constant setting range
error
The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range.
Multi-function input
selection error
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H105) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
• An up or down command was selected separately. (They must be used together.)
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were
selected at the same time.
• Speed Search 1 (61) and Speed Search 2 (62) were selected at the same time for a
digital input.
• External Baseblock NO (8) and External Baseblock NC (9) were selected at the
same time.
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) were selected while PI Control (b5-01) was
enabled.
• The emergency stop command NO and NC have been set at the same time.
Option Card selection
error
The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
3, but an Option Card isn't connected (C option).
PI control selection
error
The following settings have been made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PI Control Mode Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b5-15 (PI Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.
V/f data setting error
Constants E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
• E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
• E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) > E3-05 (FB) ≥ E3-07 (FMIN)
Constant setting error
One of the following constant setting errors exists.
• C6-05 (Carrier frequency Gain) > 6 and C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit) <
C6-04 (Carrier Frequency Lower Limit)
• Upper/lower limit error in C6-03 to 04.
EEPROM write error
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Try setting the constants again.
7-9
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Errors During Autotuning
The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, the motor
will coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and
alarm output will not function.
Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
Motor data error
There is an error in the data input for
autotuning.
There is an error in the relationship
• Check the input data.
between the motor output and the motor
• Check the capacity of the Inverter and
rated current.
motor.
The is an error between the no-load cur• Check the motor rated current and norent setting and the input motor rated
load current.
current (when autotuning for only lineto-line resistance is performed for vector
control).
Alarm
A minor fault occurred during autotuning.
STOP key input
The STOP key was pressed to cancel
autotuning.
Line-to-line resistance error
Autotuning was not completed in the
specified time.
The results of autotuning has exceeded
the setting range for a user constant.
• Check the input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
Rated current setting
alarm*
The rated current is set too high.
Check the input data (particularly the
motor rated current).
• Check the input data.
• Check wiring and the machine.
• Check the load.
* Displayed after autotuning has been completed.
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function
The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following
table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an
error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and o3-01 will be displayed. The error contact output
and alarm output will not be operated.
Table 7.5 Errors during Copy Function
Function
Display
Meaning
Digital Operator
write-protected
Read
Illegal read data
Illegal write status
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
o3-01 was set to 1 to read constants
when the Digital Operator was writeprotected (o3-02 = 0).
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing constants into the Digital Operators memory.
The read data length does not agree.
Repeat the read.
Check the Digital Operator cable.
Replace the Digital Operator.
The read data are incorrect.
A low Inverter voltage has been
An attempted write of a constant to the
detected.
EEPROM of the Digital Operator
Repeat the read.
failed.
Replace the Digital Operator.
7-10
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.5 Errors during Copy Function
Function
Copy
Verify
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
ID does not match
Use the copy function for the same
The Inverter product code or software
product code and software number
number is different.
only.
Inverter capacity
does not match
The capacity of the Inverter being
copied and the capacity stored in the
Digital Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
Inverter capacity only.
Control method
matched
The control method of the Inverter
being copied and the control method
in the Digital Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
control method only.
Verify error
The constant written to the Inverter
was compared with the constant in the
Retry the copy.
Digital Operator and they were different.
Checksum error
The checksum in the Inverter constant
area was compared with the checksum
Retry the copy.
in the Digital Operator constant area
and they were different.
Verify error
The settings in the operator and the
inverter do not match.
–
7-11
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Troubleshooting
Due to constant setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as
expected when the system is started up. If that occurs, use this section as a reference and perform the
appropriate counter measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
If Constants Cannot Be Set
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn off the RUN command and then make the
settings.
Constant write enable is input.
This occurs when "constant write enable" (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-05). If the constant write enable input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the
constants.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the constant A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the constants for the
initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset key and the
Menu key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password in
constant A1-04.)
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the constant is wrong. Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-connect it.
7-12
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Troubleshooting
If the Motor Does Not Operate
The motor does not operate when the RUN key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The operation method setting is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate
when the RUN key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE key* to switch to Digital Operator operation or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).
The LOCAL/REMOTE key can be enabled or disabled by setting o2-01. It is enabled when the drive mode is
entered and o2-01 is set to 1.
INFO
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is not in drive mode.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU key make
the DRIVE indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER key. The DRIVE indicator will light up when drive mode is entered.
The operation method selection is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an external operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
The motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE key has been pressed to switch to Digital Operator
operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE key* again to return to the original setting.
The LOCAL/REMOTE key can be enabled or disabled by setting o2-01. It is enabled when the drive mode is
entered and o2-01 is set to 1.
INFO
A 3-wire control in effect.
The input method for a 3-wire control is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2wire control). If a 3 wire control is selected, the motor will not operate when a wiring that is suitable for 2-wire
control is used. When using a 3-wire control, refer to the wiring example and timing chart on Page 6-10 and
input the proper signals.
7-13
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
When using a 2-wire control, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-05, terminals S3 to S7)
to a value other than 0.
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The motor rotates in one direction only.
"Reverse run prohibited" is selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 or 3(reverse run
prohibited), the Inverter will not accept reverse run commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set
b1-04 to 0 or 2.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1(U),
T2(V), and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer
and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W, or use constant b1-04 to
reverse output direction (in V/f mode only).
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be
very long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the speed may drop already at
low output torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
If the Motor Operates at Higher Speed than the Frequency Reference
The analog frequency reference bias or gain setting is wrong.
The frequency reference bias or gain set in constant H3-03 or H3-02 influence the frequency reference. Check
to be sure that these set values are suitable.
7-14
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Troubleshooting
A signal is being input to the multifunction analog input terminal A2.
When “0” (frequency bias) is set for constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function
Selection), a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
The deceleration time is long even when a braking option is connected.
The following causes are possible.
"Stall prevention during deceleration enabled" is set.
When a braking option is connected, set constant L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to 0
(disabled). When this constant is set to 1 (enabled), the braking option does not fully work.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (constants C1-02 and C1-04).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, maybe then the motor's power limit is reached.
Consider increasing the motor capacity.
If the Motor Overheats
The load is too heavy.
If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used continuously with a torque that exceeds the motor's rated
torque, the motor will overheat. Reduce the load amount by lowering the load. Also consider increasing the
motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn
out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating
temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to be within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the Inverter output, a surge is generated between the Inverter output and the
motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is up to three times the Inverter's input power supply voltage
(i.e., 1,200 V for 400 V class). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that
is higher than the maximum surge voltage.
7-15
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
If peripheral devices like PLC’s or other are influenced by the starting
or running inverter
If electrical noise is generated by Inverter perform the following countermeasures:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply input.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's output.
• Make sure that motor and inverter are grounded properly.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring.
If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates when a RUN Command is Input
The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the
ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a
high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or higher, with an operating time of 0.1 s or
more), or one that incorporates high frequencies (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will also help to
some extent to lower the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02). In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
The machinery is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the
carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may
indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with constants
C6-02 to C6-05.
There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Inverter.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in constants d3-01 to d3-04 or install
rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
Oscillation and hunting occur.
The gain and time constant adjustments for the torque compensation may be insufficient. Lower the gain settings and raise the delay time settings. Also adjust the hunting prevention function (N1-).
Oscillation and hunting occur with PI control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PI control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P and I
constants. (Refer to Page 6-86pp.)
7-16
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Troubleshooting
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
If the motor coasts at low speed after a deceleration to stop has been executed, it means that the DC injection
braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows:
• Increase the constant b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
• Increase the constant b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
If OV (Overvoltage) or OC (Overcurrent) is Detected When a Fan
is Started, or Fan Stalls
Generation of OV (DC bus overvoltage) or OC (Overcurrent) and stalling can occur if a fan is turning before it
is started (e.g. through the windmill effect).
This can be prevented by stopping the fan rotation using DC injection braking before starting the fan. Alternatively the speed search function can be used to catch the rotating motor.
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency
range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (constants d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (constant d3-04) settings are suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) × Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the constant E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
7-17
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
7-18
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter
Maintenance and Inspection........................................8-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Maintenance and Inspection
Outline of Maintenance
The maintenance period of the Inverter is as follows:
Maintenance Period: Within 18 months from shipping from the factory or within 12 months from being delivered to the final user, whichever comes first.
Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
• There should be no abnormal heat generation.
• The ambient temperature should not be too high.
• The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
• The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LED indicators on the front
cover have all turned OFF, and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric
shock.
Fig 8.1 Periodic Inspections
Item
Inspection
External terminals,
Are all screws and bolts tight?
mounting bolts, connecAre connectors tight?
tors, etc.
Corrective Procedure
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
PCBs
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the PCBs?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Cooling fan
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or
has the total operating time exceeded
Replace the cooling fan.
20,000 hours?
Power elements
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the elements?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Smoothing capacitor
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odour?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
Cooling fins
8-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
The Inverter consists of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to ensure full functioning of the Inverter.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform
period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter's installation environment and usage conditions.
The Inverter's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Fig 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines
Part
Cooling fan
Smoothing capacitor
Soft charge resistor bypass contactor
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years
5 years
–
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
Replace with new part. (Determine need by
inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
Fuses
10 years
Replace with new part.
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs
5 years
Replace with new board. (Determine need by
inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30°C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
8-3
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced
without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and when pull the fan out in
the direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the cable.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.
1
Air flow direction
2
1
Fan cover
Fig 8.3 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction is correct (see figure above).
2. Connect the cables securely and place the connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on
the Inverter heatsink.
8-4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Maintenance and Inspection
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More
A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the Inverter.
2. Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the controler.
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate driver positioned at the
back of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, use the above described procedure in reverse order to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow direction faces the top of the
Inverter.
Air flow direction
Fan cover
Controller bracket
Controller
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 8.4 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)
8-5
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is
not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal card out downwars (in direction 2).
Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Use the removal procedure in reverse order to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller card properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing
into its plan.
The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced into place!
Removing and Mounting the
Control Circuit Terminal Card
Fig 8.5 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Always confirm that the charge indicator does not light anymore before removing or mounting the control
circuit terminal card.
IMPORTANT
8-6
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and
peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications .................................. 9-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-E7C Control characteristics
Power supply characteristics
Output ratings
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)*1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
0.55
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
17
22
27
32
1.2
1.6
2.7
3.7
5.7
8.8
12
44
55
69
82
110
130
160
3.2
4.1
7.0
9.6
15
23
31
45
58
71
85
115
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
(Proportional to input voltage.)
145
180
215
283
346
415
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
DC reactor
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-pulse rectification
120.0
+ 10%, - 15%
Optional
Built in
Not possible
Possible*2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.
9-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Standard Inverter Specifications
400 V Class
Table 9.2 400 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-E7C Control characteristics
Power supply characteristics
Output ratings
Max. applicable motor output
(kW) *1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Output ratings
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
0.55
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
1.4
1.6
2.8
4.0
5.8
6.6
9.5
13
18
24
30
1.8
2.1
3.7
5.3
7.6
8.7
12.5
17
24
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
31
39
120.0
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage fluctuation
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
DC reactor
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rectification
Model Number CIMR-E7C Power supply characteristics
40P7
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)*1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Control characteristics
40P4
Optional
Not possile
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
300
34
46
57
69
85
110
140
160
200
230
280
390
510
45
60
75
91
112
150
180
216
260
304
370
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
506
675
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
120.0
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage fluctuation
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
DC reactor
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rectification
Built in
Possible*2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa standard motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the
Inverter's rated current is higher than the motor's rated current.
* 2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse-rectification.
9-3
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-E7C Specification
Sine wave PWM
V/f control
Control characteristics
Control method
Speed control range
1:40
Speed control accuracy
±3 – 3% (25°C ± 10°C)
Frequency control range
0.0to 120.0 Hz
Frequency accuracy (temperature characteristics)
Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10°C to +40°C)
Frequency setting resolution
Analog references: ±0.1% (25°C ±10°C)
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
Analog references: 0.025/50 Hz (11 bits plus sign)
Output frequency resolution
0.01 Hz
Frequency setting signal
0 to +10V, 4 to 20 mA
Acceleration/Deceleration time
0.01 to 6000.0 s (2 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Braking torque
Approximately 20%
Main control functions
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overtorque detection, 5-speed control (maximum), acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration, 3-wire control, autotuning, cooling fan ON/OFF control, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking,
PI control (with sleep function), energy-saving control, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum),
fault reset, and copy function.
Motor protection
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Instantaneous overcurrent
protection
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
Fuse blown protection
Protective functions
*1
Overload protection
Overvoltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
Undervoltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Momentary power loss
ridethrough
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
Charge indicator
Protective structure
Environment
Stops for fuse blown.
120% of rated output current for 1 minute
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Protection by electronic circuits.
Lights up when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): 18.5 kW or less (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Open chassis type (IP00): 22 kW or more (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Ambient operating temperature
-10°C to 40°C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
–10°C to 45°C (Open chassis type)
Ambient operating humidity
95% max. (with no condensation)
Storage temperature
Application site
- 20°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Altitude
1000 m max.
Vibration
10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2 max
* 1. Increase the Inverter capacity if loads exceeding these current values are expected.
9-4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.
Inverter Application Precautions ................................ 10-2
Motor Application Precautions ...................................10-5
User Constants ..........................................................10-7
10
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Inverter Application Precautions
Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity
power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a compensating capacitor. Excessive peak current
can destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power
supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V class Inverters of 22 to 110 kW and 400 V class Inverters of 22 to 300 kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply
capacity
(kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Required
DC or AC reactor
Not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Fig 10.1
Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so
that the rated output current of the Inverter is minimum 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristic generally is different from those when starting a
motor at a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a
somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both, the motor and the inverter.
Options
Terminals , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa. Never
connect any other devices to these terminals.
10-2
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Inverter Application Precautions
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location where it is not subjected to oil mist, dust, and other contaminants,
or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so
that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not install the
Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 120 Hz. Incorrect settings
can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set upper limits. (The maximum output
frequency is factory-set to 50 Hz.)
DC Injection Braking
The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking current or braking time is set to a too large value.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load
torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD2/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or deceleration, it might be necessary to increase the acceleration or deceleration time.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
10
10-3
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and control sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing
so can cause the Inverter to malfunction. Do not turn the inverter power supply ON and OFF more than one
time every 30 minutes.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out
before performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric
shock.
10-4
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Motor Application Precautions
Motor Application Precautions
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor.
Low Speed Ranges
Cooling effects diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase of the motor temperature. Therefore,
the motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range whenever using a fan cooled motor.
Installation Withstand Voltage
If the input voltage is high (480 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation voltage must
be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Noise
Noise varies with the carrier frequency. At high carrier frequencies, the noise is almost the same when the
motor is operated with a commercial power supply.
10
10-5
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select an appropriate
Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select
an Inverter by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use
a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent voltage drop and thereby motor torque
reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is to be used, it must be subjected to an explosion-proof test in conjunction
with the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the
Inverter. Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in damaging.
If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz, consult the manufacturer.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will
be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will
make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at low speeds
continuously.
10-6
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constants
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table. These are factory settings for a 200 V Class Inverter with
0.4 kW (open loop vector control).
Table 10.1 User Constants
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
A1-00
Language selection for digital operator display (JVOP-160)
A1-01
Constant access level
2
A1-03
Initialize
0
Setting
0
A1-04
Password
0
A1-05
Password setting
0
A2-01 to
User setting constants
A2-32
–
b1-01
Reference source selection
1
b1-02
RUN command source selection
1
b1-03
Stopping method selection
0
b1-04
Prohibition of reverse operation
0
b1-07
Operation selection after switching to remote mode
0
b1-08
Run command selection in programming modes
0
b1-11
RUN delay
0s
b1-12
HAND Fref Source
0
b2-01
Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting frequency)
0.5 Hz
b2-02
DC injection braking current
50 %
b2-03
DC injection braking time at start
0.00 s
b2-04
DC injection braking time at stop
0.50 s
b2-09
Motor pre-heat current
0%
b3-01
Speed search selection
2
b3-02
Speed search operating current
120 %*1
b3-03
Speed search deceleration time
2.0 s
b3-05
Speed search wait time
0.2 s
b3-14
Bi-directional speed search selection
1
b4-01
Timer function ON-delay time
0.0 s
b4-02
Timer function OFF-delay time
0.0 s
b5-01
PI control mode selection
0
b5-02
Proportional gain (P)
1.00
b5-03
Integral (I) time
1.0 s
b5-04
Integral (I) limit
100.0 %
b5-06
PI limit
100.0 %
b5-07
PI offset adjustment
0.0 %
b5-08
PI delay time constant
0.00 s
b5-09
PI output characteristics selection
0
b5-10
PI output gain
1.0
b5-11
PI reverse output selection
0
b5-12
Selection of PI feedback loss detection
0
b5-13
PI feedback loss detection level
0%
b5-14
PI feedback loss detection time
1.0 s
b5-15
PI sleep function operation level
0.0 Hz
b5-16
PI sleep operation delay time
0.0 s
b5-17
Acceleration/deceleration time for PI reference
0.0 s
10
10-7
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table 10.1 User Constants
b5-18
PI Setpoint Selection
Factory
Setting
0
b5-19
PI Setpoint
0.0 %
No.
Name
b5-20
PI Setpoint Scaling
0
b5-21
PI Sleep Function Selection
0
b5-22
Snooze Level
0%
b5-23
Snooze Delay Time
0s
b5-24
Wake Up-level
0%
b5-25
Setpoint Boost
0%
b5-26
Maximum Boost Time
0s
b5-27
Snooze feedback
60 %
b5-28
PI Feedback Square Root Operation
0
b5-29
PI Feedback Square Root Gain
1.00
b5-30
PI Output Monitor Square Root
0
b8-01
Energy-saving mode selection
0
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
b8-05
Power detection filter time constant
Setting
*4
20 ms
b8-06
Search operation voltage limiter
0%
C1-01
Acceleration time 1
10.0 s
C1-02
Deceleration time 1
10.0 s
C1-03
Acceleration time 2
10.0 s
C1-04
Deceleration time 2
10.0 s
C1-09
Emergency stop time
10.0 s
C1-11
Accel/decel time switching frequency
0.0 Hz
C2-01
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start
0.20 s
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end
0.20 s
C4-01
Torque compensation gain
1.00
C4-02
Torque compensation time constant
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
C6-03
Carrier Frequency Upper Limit
15 kHz*1
C6-04
Carrier Frequency Lower Limit
15 kHz*1
C6-05
Carrier Freq. Proportional Gain
00
d1-01
Frequency reference 1
0.00 Hz
d1-02
Frequency reference 2
0.00 Hz
d1-03
Frequency reference 3
0.00 Hz
d1-04
Frequency reference 4
0.00 Hz
200 ms*1
6
d1-17
Jog frequency reference
6.00 Hz
d2-01
Frequency reference upper limit
100.0 %
d2-02
Frequency reference lower limit
0.0 %
d2-03
Master speed reference lower limit
0.0 %
d3-01
Jump frequency 1
0.0 Hz
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
0.0 Hz
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
0.0 Hz
d3-04
Jump frequency width
1.0 Hz
d4-01
Frequency reference hold function selection
d4-02
+ - Speed limits
10 %
0
E1-01
Input voltage setting
200 V*2
10-8
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constants
Table 10.1 User Constants
E1-03
V/f pattern selection
Factory
Setting
F
E1-04
Max. output frequency
50.0 Hz
E1-05
Max. voltage
200.0 V*2
E1-06
Base frequency
50.0 Hz
E1-07
Mid. output frequency
2.5 Hz *1
E1-08
Mid. output frequency voltage
15.0 V*2
E1-09
Min. output frequency
1.2 Hz
E1-10
Min. output frequency voltage
9.0 V*2
E1-11
Mid. output frequency 2
0.0 Hz*3
E1-12
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
0.0 V*3
E1-13
Base voltage
0.0 V*4
E2-01
Motor rated current
1.90 A*1
E2-03
Motor no-load current
1, 2*2
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance
F6-01
Operation selection after communications error
1
F6-02
Input level of external error from Communications Option Card
0
F6-03
Stopping method for external error from Communications Option
Card
1
F6-05
I monitor unit selection
1
H1-01
Terminal S3 function selection
24
H1-02
Terminal S4 function selection
14
H1-03
Terminal S5 function selection
3 (0)*5
H1-04
Terminal S6 function selection
4 (3)*5
H1-05
Terminal S7 function selection
6 (4)*5
H2-01
Terminal M1-M2 function selection
No.
Name
9.842Ω*3
0
H2-02
Terminal M3-M4 function selection
H3-02
Gain (terminal A1)
100.0 %
H3-03
Bias (terminal A1)
0.0 %
H3-08
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection
H3-09
Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection
H3-10
Gain (terminal A2)
Setting
1
2
0
100.0 %
H3-11
Bias (terminal A2)
0.0 %
H3-12
Analog input filter time constant
0.00 s
H3-13
Terminal A1/A2 switching
0
H4-01
Monitor selection (terminal FM)
2
H4-02
Gain (terminal FM)
100 %
H4-03
Bias (terminal FM)
0.0 %
H4-04
Monitor selection (terminal AM)
H4-05
Gain (terminal AM)
50 %
H4-06
Bias (terminal AM)
0.0 %
H4-07
Analog output 1 signal level selection
10
3
0
H4-08
Analog output 2 signal level selection
0
H5-01
Station address
1F
H5-02
Communications speed selection
3
H5-03
Communications parity selection
0
10-9
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Table 10.1 User Constants
H5-04
Stopping method after communications error
Factory
Setting
3
H5-05
Communications error detection selection
1
H5-06
Send wait time
H5-07
RTS control ON/OFF
No.
Name
H5-08
Communications Selection
H5-09
CE detection time
L1-01
Motor protection selection
L1-02
Motor protection time constant
Setting
5 ms
1
0
2.0 sec
1
1.0 min
L1-03
Alarm operation selection during motor overheating
3
L1-04
Motor overheating operation selection
1
L1-05
Motor temperature input filter time constant
L2-01
Momentary power loss detection
0.20 s
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
0.1 s*1
L2-03
Min. baseblock time
0.1s *1
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
0.3 s *1
L2-05
Undervoltage detection level
190 V*2
L3-01
Stall prevention selection during acceleration
L3-02
Stall prevention level during acceleration
120 %
L3-04
Stall prevention selection during decel
1
L3-05
Stall prevention selection during running
L3-06
Stall prevention level during running
L4-01
Speed agreement detection level
0.0 Hz
L4-02
Speed agreement detection width
2.0 Hz
L4-05
Operation when frequency reference is missing
L4-06
Fref @ Fref Loss
L5-01
Number of auto restart attempts
L5-02
Auto restart operation selection
L5-03
Fault Retry Time
L6-01
Torque detection selection 1
L6-02
Torque detection level 1
L6-03
Torque detection time 1
0.1 s
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
95 °C
L8-03
Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm
3
L8-06
Input phase loss detection level
5%
L8-09
Ground protection selection
1
L8-10
Cooling fan control selection
0
0
1
1
120 %
0
80 %
0
0
10.0 x
0
150 %
L8-11
Cooling fan control delay time
60 s
L8-12
Ambient temperature
45 °C
L8-15
OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds
1
L8-18
Soft CLA selection
1
L8-19
Frequency reference during OH pre-alarm
N1-01
Hunting-prevention function selection
20.0 %
1
N1-02
Hunting-prevention gain
1.00
N3-01
High-slip braking deceleration frequency width
5%
N3-02
High-slip braking current limit
150 %
N3-03
High-slip braking stop dwell time
1.0 s
10-10
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
User Constants
Table 10.1 User Constants
No.
*
*
*
*
*
*
Name
Factory
Setting
40 s
N3-04
High-slip braking OL time
o1-01
Monitor selection
o1-02
Monitor selection after powerup
1
o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
0
o1-05
LCD Focus
3
Setting
6
*6
o1-06
Monitor mode Selection
0
o1-07
*6
2nd monitor selection
2
o1-08
3rd monitor selection*6
2
o2-01
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
1
o2-02
STOP key during control circuit terminal operation
1
o2-03
User constant initial value
0
o2-04
kVA selection
0*4
o2-05
Frequency reference setting method selection
0
o2-06
Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected
0
o2-07
Cumulative operation time setting
0 hr
o2-08
Cumulative operation time selection
0
o2-09
Initialize mode
2
o2-10
Fan operation time setting
0 hr
o2-12
Fault trace initialisation
0
02-14
Energy monitor initialize
0
o2-15
HAND key function selection
1
o3-01
Copy function selection
0
o3-02
Read permition selection
0
T1-02
Motor output power
0.40 kW *4
T1-04
Motor rated current
1.90 A*4
T1-06
Number of motor poles
4
1. Initial setting depends on Inverter capacity.
2. Setting for 200 V class Inverters. For 400 V class Inverters, double the value.
3. The contents is ignored if the setting is 0.0.
4. E1-13 will have the same value as E1-05 after autotuning.
5. Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3-wire sequence.
6. Parameter is only effective if HOA operator with LCD (JVOP-162) is used.
10
10-11
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
10-12
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Sales and Service Network in Europe and Worldwide
European Headquarters: Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany
Tel.: +49 (0) 6196 - 569 300, Fax.: +49 (0) 6196 - 569 398
www.yaskawa.de
European Subsidiaries
UK, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Unit 2, Centurion Court
Brick Close, Kiln Farm, Milton Keynes Bucks MK11 3JA, UK
Tel.: +44 (0) 1908 - 565 874, Fax.: +44 (0) 1908 - 565 891
www.yaskawa.co.uk
Italy, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Via Emilia Ovest 95/F
41013 Castelfranco E. (MO), Italy
Tel.: +39 059 - 92 21 21, Fax.: +39 059 - 92 21 68
France, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Z.A des Béthunes, 2, rue du Rapporteur
95310 St Ouen L’Aumône, France
Tel:+33 (0)1 39 09 09 00, Fax:+33 (0)1 30 37 29 02
Spain, Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, Errekalde etorbidea, 59.
20018 Donostia - San Sebastian, Spain
Tel:+34 943 360 832, Fax:+34 943 360 193
Headquarters Worldwide
Tokyo Office
Yaskawa Electric Corporation, New Pier Takeshiba South Tower
1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo 105-6891, Japan
Tel.: +81 (0) 3 - 5402 4511, Fax.: +81 (0) 3 - 5402 4580
www.yaskawa.co.jp
American Headquarter
Yaskawa Electric America Inc., 2121 Norman Drive South
Waukegan, Il 60085, U.S.A.
Tel.: +1 (847)- 887-7000, Fax.: +1 (847)- 887-7370
www.yaskawa.com
Yaskawa Electric Europe GmbH, February 2003
Printed in Germany
YEG-TOE-S616-56.1B
based on YEC-TOE-S616-55.1
Artisan Technology Group - Quality Instrumentation ... Guaranteed | (888) 88-SOURCE | www.artisantg.com
Artisan Technology Group is an independent supplier of quality pre-owned equipment
Gold-standard solutions
We buy equipment
Learn more!
Extend the life of your critical industrial,
Planning to upgrade your current
Visit us at artisantg.com for more info
commercial, and military systems with our
equipment? Have surplus equipment taking
on price quotes, drivers, technical
superior service and support.
up shelf space? We'll give it a new home.
specifications, manuals, and documentation.
Artisan Scientific Corporation dba Artisan Technology Group is not an affiliate, representative, or authorized distributor for any manufacturer listed herein.
We're here to make your life easier. How can we help you today?
(217) 352-9330 I [email protected] I artisantg .com
">